JP2021112373A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To solve a risk of a decrease in an interest in a game when a game performance results in a jackpot relatively disadvantageous to a player while increasing an interest in a game in execution of a game performance having high jackpot reliability, where a conventional game machine had a plurality of jackpots, namely those relatively advantageous and those relatively disadvantageous to a player, had a plurality of game performances having different execution modes and showed different jackpot reliability depending on a game performance to be executed, enhanced a player's interest in a game in execution of a game performance having high jackpot reliability, and further enhanced an interest in a game when an advantageous jackpot occurs.SOLUTION: In a game machine having diverse game performances, the game machine is capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 95

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

In a conventional gaming machine, a hit / fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability based on the ball entering the starting port, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. There was one that performed a jackpot game that opened the winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the variable display of the symbol, and there is a possibility that the result of the hit / fail judgment may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. (For example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, as a jackpot, there were a plurality of jackpots, a jackpot that was relatively advantageous to the player and a jackpot that was relatively disadvantageous. Further, as a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.), a plurality of game effects having different execution modes are provided, and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the game effect to be executed. As a result, the player's game interest is enhanced when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, and the game interest is further enhanced when the jackpot is advantageous.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-57583

In a gaming machine as described above, when a game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, the game interest is enhanced, while when the jackpot is relatively disadvantageous to the player as a result of the game production, the game is played. There was a risk that the interest would decline.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a gaming effect that enhances the entertainment of the gaming.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A privilege granting unit that grants a predetermined privilege based on the result of the variable display of the identification information being a specific result, and
A gaming machine including a game effect executing unit capable of executing a game effect according to the variable display of the identification information.
As the game effect, it has a decorative image change effect that changes the display mode of a specific decorative image composed of a plurality of image elements.
The decorative image change effect is
A first image display in which different image elements selected from the plurality of image elements are sequentially displayed at at least two display timings and the displayed state is maintained for the first time, and
At the special display timing, which is the timing after the predetermined image element is displayed at the at least two display timings, the image element different from the image element displayed at the at least two display timings is displayed, and the display is performed. It is characterized by making it possible to execute a second image display that maintains the state for a second time.

According to such a gaming machine, as a game effect that can be executed according to the variable display of the identification information, there is a decorative image change effect that changes the display mode of the specific decorative image composed of a plurality of image elements. Further, in the decorative image change effect, a first image in which different image elements selected from a plurality of image elements constituting the specific decorative image are sequentially displayed at at least two display timings and the display state is maintained for the first time. It is possible to execute display and a second image display that displays an image element different from the image elements displayed so far and maintains the display state for a second time at a special display timing after the first image display. And. As a result, in the decorative image change effect, attention is paid to the display mode of the image element of the specific decorative image a plurality of times (at least twice), and the display of additional image elements that may occur after that is expected, and the game is played. Increase the interest. The display timings at least twice and the special display timings are different timings in chronological order.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest by executing various gaming effects.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the production start processing at the time of entering a ball. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as a notice effect. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as a notice effect. It is a flowchart of execution processing such as a rehearsal effect. It is a flowchart of the variation production end processing. It is a flowchart of a special game production selection process. It is a flowchart of an ending effect selection process. It is a table which shows the notice decision table for a low load state. It is a table which shows the notice decision table for a high load state. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as the advance notice effect of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting process such as the advance notice effect of Example 2. It is a table which shows the advance notice determination table for the high load state of the gaming machine which concerns on Example 2. It is a flowchart of the special game effect selection process of Example 3. It is a flowchart of the ending effect selection process of Example 3. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing of Example 4. It is a table which shows the advance notice determination table for the high load state of another aspect 1. It is a table which shows the advance notice determination table for the high load state of another aspect 2. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 6. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance notice effect of Example 6. It is a figure which shows the image element which constitutes the button operation notice effect of Example 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the button operation notice effect of Example 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the button operation notice effect of Example 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the button operation notice effect of Example 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the button operation notice effect of Example 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the button operation notice effect of Example 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance reach notice effect of Example 8. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance reach notice effect of Example 8. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance reach notice effect of Example 8. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance reach notice effect of Example 8. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the advance reach notice effect of Example 8. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode such as the advance notice effect of Example 9. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode such as the advance notice effect of Example 9. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode such as the advance notice effect of Example 9. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode such as the advance notice effect of Example 9. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode such as the advance notice effect of Example 9. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode such as the advance notice effect of Example 9. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode such as the advance notice effect of Example 9. It is a figure which shows the symbol which is displayed in the pseudo-variation notice effect of Example 10. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the pseudo-variation notice effect of Example 10. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the pseudo-variation notice effect of Example 10. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the pseudo-variation notice effect of Example 10. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the pseudo-variation notice effect of Example 10. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the pseudo-variation notice effect of Example 10. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the image display notice effect of Example 11. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the image display notice effect of Example 11. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the image display notice effect of Example 11. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the image display notice effect of Example 11. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution mode of the image display notice effect of Example 11.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a game. It is detachably configured from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported on one side end side and are configured to be openable and closable, respectively.

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively, these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. Therefore, simply "effect button 63" and "input means") are provided. As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example,) that can detect the input from the player or that the player directly contacts the button portion to input the effect button 63. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. good.

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding the game ball are projected. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side. An image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an “effect symbol display unit”) on which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbol 8”) are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect symbol display area 7b is composed of, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and the middle effect is displayed in the middle symbol display area. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed on the first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as "first special symbol display unit") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variation display of the first special symbol and the result of the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit") (that is, the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct). (Simply referred to as "win / fail judgment") is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with the same three-digit doublet (also referred to as “hit effect symbol”) such as “777”.

In addition, in the case of a small hit, it is possible to stop and display the production symbol with a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit production symbol"). Is. In addition, in the case of deviation, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" may be stopped and displayed with a different pattern (also referred to as "off effect symbol"). It is possible. As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. The effect symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b is observed and grasped. It is not necessary to separately provide the positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas may be used as the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). .. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbol, for example, there is a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, and the like. In addition, a control unit that controls the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the effect symbol, and a display unit that displays the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the effect symbol are referred to as an "identification information display unit". Also called.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, a hit game effect executed in association with the hit game and a waiting for customers are used. Demo production etc. are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of storages of the first special figure hold, which will be described later, is displayed. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold or the second effect hold, the number of stored first special figure hold and the second feature displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, the control unit that executes these game effects is also referred to as a "game effect execution unit". Further, the display unit that displays these game effects is also referred to as a "game effect display unit".

A center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member falls downward with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting, and the movable decoration The member covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the member becomes visible. As a result, the player raises the expectation for hitting. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct (first special symbol is correct or not). Judgment) is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

Below the first starting port 20, a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable starting port”) including a variable second starting port 21 that changes the ease of entering the game ball is provided. .. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the accuracy of the second special symbol is determined (the second special symbol is determined to be correct or not). ) Is executed, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first mode. be. The movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the game ball is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

On the right side of the first start opening 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device 31 (also referred to as a “first variable ball entrance”) provided with a first big winning opening 30 is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first variable entry port 31 is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32. It can be changed to.

Further, in the game area 3, above the first large winning opening 30, and at the lower right of the center decoration 10, the second large winning device 36 provided with the second large winning opening 35 (“the second variable entry opening”). ") Is provided. The second special winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (blade member) 37, and opens and closes the second special winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

That is, the second variable entry port 36 is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state in which the game ball can enter (open state) due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37. It can be changed to. The second special winning device 36 is formed with a specific area 39 through which a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 35 can pass. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the high probability state described later is generated based on the detection that the gaming ball that has entered the second major winning opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39. That is, the specific area 39 is a probability variation operation port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first large winning device 31.

A gate 28 (game ball passage port) through which the game ball can pass is provided in the right side area of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, it is normally determined whether or not to open the second starting port 21. As the symbol winning / failing determination is executed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, a plurality of general entrances 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3.

The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. A method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called a left-handed hit, and a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called a right-handed hit. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game is started, a left-handed hit is aimed at entering the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to a hit in the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first start opening 20, the gate 28, the second start opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second start opening 20 are hit right. The aim is to enter the large winning opening 35. Then, when a game ball enters the first start opening, the second start opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening, and the general entry opening, each entry opening is predetermined. A number of game balls (also called "prize balls") are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) that displays a variable display and a stop display of a normal symbol are included. Further, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of 2 special figure hold) and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is a hit, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. When the result is a hit, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the launch direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the state should be left-handed or should be left-handed. The various indicators included in the main indicator 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed, and the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 by the stopped displayed special symbol (stop symbol). The result of the lottery based on (special symbol winning / failing judgment, big hit lottery) will be notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the open pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as stopped is used. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is the first big hit (15R big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the second big hit (2R big hit) is reached, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When a small hit occurs, the four "mnop" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined as a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, the light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on as described above.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various information (“acquisition information”” such as a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is based on the ball entering. (Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first start port 20, it is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a as the first special figure hold, and if the ball enters the second start port 21, the second special figure is reserved. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as a hold. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbol. Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is correct for the incoming ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

The number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●".

Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of holds 1 to 1. No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuatingly for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. It should be noted that the off-normal symbol is not a specific ordinary symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off. be.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired based on the passage, and various acquired information is acquired. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four.

The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, when the variation display of the normal symbol is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number up to a predetermined number.

Then, the number of such a normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. be. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (also referred to as a “main control unit”, which is also referred to as a “game control unit”) that controls game profits such as a special symbol winning / failing determination, a normal symbol winning / failing determination, and a transition of a game state. ”), Sub-control board 90 (also referred to as“ sub-control unit ”and also referred to as“ effect control unit ”) that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and payout control that controls the payout of the game ball. Board 110 (also referred to as "payout control unit"), effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, symbol displayed on the effect display 102, effect 1 special figure hold indicator 103a, and effect 2 special figure. It includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) and the like that control the display of the hold display 103b and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with a storage case for an image control board or the like that houses the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and the sub control board that houses the sub control board 90 is stored on the storage case for the image control board or the like. A case is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and general sensors. The entry sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. The general entry port sensor 27a is provided in each general entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36.

Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal diagram. A hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a launch direction indicator 47, and a hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is stored in a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (a prepaid card (game value storage medium) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and inserted). (A device that enables ball lending based on the information provided) is connected, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls and pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launch device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 rotates the launch handle 60. Detect the amount. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a voice control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the effect 1 special figure hold display 103a, and the effect 2 hold display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols, hold symbols, etc.). And image data such as background images are stored. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the effect symbol 8, and the effect symbol is turned on / off or a combination of colors is used to turn on / off the two LEDs. Stop display is performed in a display mode showing the display result of 8 (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination). Further, the effect 1 special figure hold indicator 103a and the effect 2 hold indicator 103b are also composed of two LEDs in the same manner. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the effect 1st special figure hold indicator 103a is displayed on the 1st effect hold display area 9c by the number of holds and the 1st special figure hold indicator 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds to be displayed. Further, the effect second special figure hold indicator 103b is displayed in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Be controlled. In this method, the character symbol is displayed on substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated to display the character symbol on substantially the entire effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol display unit) on the display screen 7a. By covering the effect symbol, the first effect hold display unit, or a part or all of the second effect hold display unit may not be visible, such a display is provided. .. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and the lighting of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, on the sub-control board 90, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) are performed. The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 such as the corresponding effect button detection switch.

Next, the control related to the hit / fail determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, there are "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are multiple types of hits. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits include "15R (round) first big hit", "15R second big hit", "2R third big hit", and "15R fourth big hit". In "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 4th jackpot", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times, and it is the first round. In the second round, it is a big hit that opens the second big winning opening 35 in a manner that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 (easily). The round aiming at the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 can be called a chance round or a challenge round. "15R 2nd big hit" is the first round, which is the above-mentioned chance round, although the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 15 times. The opening time of the second round is extremely short (opening and closing for a moment), and it is a big hit that makes it difficult (or even impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. That is, it can be said that this "15R second big hit" is a big hit that does not open the second big winning device 36 in a manner in which the game ball can pass through (easily) the specific area 39. In "2R 3rd big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is 2 times, and the 1st round and the 2nd round which are chance rounds. This is a big hit that opens the second big winning device 36 in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39. However, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds even if the first round and the second round are combined, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area is lower than that of the 15R first big hit. It has become.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the high probability state described later. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is the above-mentioned 15R 1st jackpot, 2R 3rd jackpot, or 15R 4th jackpot, the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area is relatively high. Since the second round and the second chance round are executed, the game state after the big hit game can be shifted to the high probability state by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the big hit game. .. On the other hand, in the case of the 15R second big hit, the opening time of each of the first round and the second round chance round is 0.1 second, so the game ball is put into the second big winning opening. Since it is very difficult to make the game ball pass through the specific area 39 during the execution of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is the normal state (low probability state) described later. It is very likely that it will be (it can be said that it will be in a low probability state).

On the other hand, the small hit is a hit that opens the big winning opening (the second big winning opening 35) in the same opening pattern as the 2R third big hit. That is, in the small hit, the second big winning device 36 is opened in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39. However, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of the small hit game, the game state after the execution of the small hit game is not changed from that before the execution of the small hit game. Therefore, if the gaming state before the execution of the small hit game is the normal state (low probability state), the gaming state after the execution of the small hit game is also the normal state. From the player's point of view, the above-mentioned 2R 3rd big hit and small hit cannot be distinguished from each other even by looking at the opening pattern of the big winning opening (2nd big winning opening 35). That is, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is the 2R third big hit or the small hit. Therefore, even if the game ball is passed to the specific area 39 during the special game as the 2R third big hit, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the high probability state. Further, even if the game ball is passed to the specific area 39 during the special game as a small hit, it is difficult to recognize whether the subsequent game state remains in the normal state or shifts to the high probability state. Is. As a result, in the case of a small hit or a 2R third big hit, it is possible to proceed with the game with the expectation that it may be in a high probability state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. can. In the case of small hits, the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times it is opened.

More specifically, the opening pattern of the big winning opening when each big hit and small hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is as shown in FIG. That is, when the 15R first jackpot is reached (when the 15R first jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), and when the 15R fourth jackpot is reached (on the second special symbol display 41b). (When the 15R 4th big hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the 2nd big winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 1R to 2R, and the 1st big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 3R to 15R. .. In this case, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st R and the 2nd R is 28 seconds each, it is easy to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the round.

In addition, when the 15R second big hit is reached (when the 15R second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second big winning opening 35 is 0.1 at maximum from 1R to 2R. Open for a maximum of 28 seconds from the first big winning opening 30 from 3R to 15R. In this case, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st and 2nd rounds is set to a maximum of 0.1 seconds, which is an extremely short time (opening and closing for a moment), so that the game ball goes to the specific area 39 during the round. It is almost impossible to pass through.

That is, the opening pattern for the 15R second jackpot is different from the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot in the opening modes of the first round and the second round. That is, in the 15R first big hit, since the second big winning opening 35 opens for 28 seconds in the first and second rounds, the game ball easily enters the second big winning opening 35. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 will pass through the specific area 39 with high possibility. On the other hand, in the 15R second big hit, the second big winning opening 35 opens only 0.1 seconds in the first and second rounds. Therefore, it is very difficult for the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during the execution of the 15R second jackpot is considerably lower than that of the 15R first jackpot. Further, since the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is infinitely close to 0, it may be said that the game ball does not pass through.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the 2R 3rd jackpot is won (when the 2R 3rd jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the 1st special symbol display 41a), the 2nd jackpot 35 from 1R to 2R Is released for up to 0.9 seconds. In this case, since the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 in the 1st and 2nd rounds is 1.8 seconds in total, it is possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the round. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, one gaming ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds, it is sufficiently possible to insert the game ball into the second large winning opening 35. In addition, since the total opening time of the 2nd big prize opening is as short as 1.8 seconds in this 2R 3rd big hit, it is not possible to expect as many prize balls (game profit) as other 15R big hits. That is, it is a big hit that can hardly get a prize ball compared to other big hits.

In addition, when it becomes the first small hit (when the first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when it becomes the second small hit (the second special symbol display 41b). When the second small hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the second large winning opening 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the big winning opening is opened in the same opening pattern as the 2R 3rd big hit. Even in this small hit, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 is 1.8 seconds in total, it is possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39. However, as described above, there is no change in the game state before and after the small hit game even if the specific area 39 is passed. In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds for this small hit, it is not possible to expect as many prize balls as the 2R third big hit. That is, the small hit has almost no privilege for the player (only the prize ball by entering the ball) in terms of the transition of the game state and the prize ball.
That is, in this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second winning opening 35, the first opening pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 (easy to pass) and (15 first jackpot, 15R fourth jackpot). A second open pattern in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the specific area 39 (impossible to pass) (15R second jackpot), and a second open pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area and is less likely to pass than the first open pattern. It can have 3 open patterns and (2R 3rd jackpot). Further, as an opening pattern for small hits, it is assumed that the game ball has a fourth opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 but does not give a privilege (does not generate a high probability state) even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39. can do. As another aspect, the fourth opening pattern may be an opening pattern that cannot pass through the specific area 39.

The probability of distribution to each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 50% for the 15R second jackpot, and 10% for the 2R third jackpot. There is. On the other hand, the big hits in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are all 15R fourth big hits. That is, when a big hit is made based on the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the second starting port 21, which is easy to enter due to the operation of the opening extension function (occurrence of a high base state) described later, the 15R fourth jackpot is always made. It becomes. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played in the second starting port 21 rather than being a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (big hit lottery of the first special symbol) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that it is more likely that the player will be advantageous if the ball hits the ball in the winning / failing judgment (the big hit lottery of the second special symbol). That is, the player plays the game in anticipation of entering the second starting port 21. This is particularly remarkable during the operation of the opening extension function in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 include "reach random numbers" in addition to the special symbol hit / fail determination random numbers and the jackpot type determination random numbers. (Also referred to as "reach information") "and" variable pattern random numbers (also referred to as "variable pattern information") ".

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate a reach in a game effect (effect symbol game effect) that indicates the result by using the effect symbol when the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination is wrong. Reach means, for example, a state in which two left and right effect symbols 8R and 8L are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the same symbol, and the remaining one medium effect symbol 8C is changing (“7 ↓ 7”). Status). Then, if the changing medium effect symbol 8C stops at the same symbol as the stopped effect symbols 8R and 8L, the three effect symbols stop at the same symbol, which is a hit. The stop (temporary stop) of the effect symbol in this case also includes a display (sway fluctuation) that seems to be slightly shaken in the effect symbol display area 7b. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 126.

Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the normal symbol hit / miss determination random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (ordinary symbol lottery). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of gaming states by a combination in which each of the functions of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening extension function for the special symbol and the normal symbol is in the operating state or the non-operating state. .. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is operating is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is called a "normal state (also called a" low probability state "). ". In the high probability state, the probability of being judged as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing judgment is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the normal state, but in the high probability state, the jackpot judgment table for the high probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged as the jackpot is large is used. It is used to determine whether or not it is correct (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated.

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective ball entry to the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may be operated at the same time, or only one of them may be operated. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening function for the special symbol. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the time saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the non-time-saving state. That is, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed using the normal symbol hit judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) judged to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time saving state. (See FIG. 8 (D)). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Also, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state. That is, the function of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the non-time saving state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation once for 0.2 seconds, and the second starting port is opened during that period. Become. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the time saving state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

In the situation where the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared with the case where these functions are not operating. Therefore, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is referred to as a "high base state", and the state in which these functions are not operating is referred to as a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

The high base state (high frequency state) does not have to activate all the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22, the function is not activated. However, it is sufficient that the second starting port is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game in the case of the 15R first big hit is a high probability state of the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. In addition, the special symbol is in a time-saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy and high base state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, or when the jackpot is executed and the jackpot game is executed.

Further, in the game state after the special game in the case of the 15R second big hit, it is extremely difficult to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game. Moreover, it becomes a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy and high base state". The low-accuracy high-base state ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display of a special symbol is executed, or when a big hit is won and the big hit game is executed. The possibility is extremely low, but if it passes through the specific area 39, it will be in a “high accuracy and high base state”.

Further, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the game state after the special game when the 2R third big hit is made is the height of the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. It becomes a stochastic state, a non-time saving state of a special symbol, and a low base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy and low base state". The high-accuracy-low-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, or when the jackpot is executed and the jackpot game is executed.

This high-probability low-base state is a state in which the high-probability state is latent, that is, the high-probability state is difficult for the player to recognize. That is, the high probability low base state is a so-called "latent probability change state (also referred to as" probability non-notification state ")". On the other hand, the above-mentioned high-probability high-base state is a state in which it is clear to the player that it is a high-probability state. That is, the high-accuracy high-base state is the so-called "probability-changing game state".

Further, in the high base state, the game state after the special game when the 2R third big hit is made is a high probability state of the special symbol and the special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. It becomes a time saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). That is, the time saving function and the base state of the special symbol are the same as the state before the execution of the special game.

When playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal state of the special symbol, a non-time saving state of the special symbol, and a low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B by hitting the right side. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it has become. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) rather than hitting left. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify the right gaming area that the launch should be performed.

On the other hand, in a low base state such as a high accuracy low base state or a low accuracy low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A by hitting the left side. Further, in the low base state, the second starting port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the first starting port 20 than to enter the ball into the second starting port 21. Because it has become. Therefore, a left-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct) rather than hitting right. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing direction indicator 47 should be launched to the left game area.

Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 38. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter resets. And so on. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In Example 1 and the drawings, the normal symbol is "general diagram", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" and "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interrupt is enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 ms. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, first large winning port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. The detection signal detected by the 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), the normal symbol operation process (S205), the special symbol operation process (S206), and the specific area sensor detection process (S207), which will be described later. , Hold ball number processing (S208), and power failure monitoring processing (S209) are executed. After that, other processing (S210) not deeply related to the present invention is executed to end the interrupt processing (S105). Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec). ), Interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). .. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of normal figure hold provided in the RAM) It is determined whether or not the number is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), proceed to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7B) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquired information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol reserved balls in the normal symbol reserved storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S305). If the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but if the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the special figure 2 The number of reserved balls (the number of 2nd special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of 2nd special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached 4 (upper limit number). Whether or not it is determined (S306). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than four (NO in S306), Special figure 2 Add 1 to the number of reserved balls (S307).

Subsequently, the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (A)). The acquired random number values (acquisition information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). ). If the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process ends, but if the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of 1st special figure hold, specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of 1st special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached 4 (upper limit number). Whether or not it is determined (S310). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 reaches four (YES in S310), the process ends, but when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than four (NO in S310), Special figure 1 Add "1" to the number of reserved balls (S311).

Subsequently, the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), value of random number counter for determining jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), value of reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), value of fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (That is, the random number values shown in FIG. 7A are acquired), and the acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the first special figure 1 in the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a. ..

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 13 after the start port sensor detection process (S204). In the normal figure operation process (S205), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The operation status of the normal diagram is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). This process is finished. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / miss determination process described later is performed (S502). Further, after the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (E) is referred to, and if the game state is a time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern having a normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed. Further, following the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / miss judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is ON, that is, it is in the time saving state (YES in S602), among the normal symbol hit judgment tables shown in FIG. 8 (D), the table for the time saving state (the hit judgment value is Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail determination based on "0" to "239"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, when it is determined in S602 that the time saving flag is not ON, that is, it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time saving state among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (D) ( It is determined whether or not the hit is a hit (S603) by the low-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the hit judgment values "0" and "1"), and the process proceeds to S605.
Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be wrong (NO in S605), the stop display is lost. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary symbol) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal symbol hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift processing]
Following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if not, the process ends (NO in S801). On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802) and the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the normal symbol at the display result (hit normal symbol or out-of-order normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not (S804), this process is performed. To finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal map hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time saving state is in progress (S902). Then, if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern in the time saving state is an opening pattern in which the opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). As described above, the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is an opening pattern in which opening for 0.2 seconds is performed once. Therefore, "1" is set in the second start port opening counter. Then, following the set of the open pattern (S903, S906), the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), if not (NO in S1003), the process is completed, and if it is reached, the second The start port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, the opening of the second starting port 21 and then a predetermined opening). Judging (whether or not the time has passed) (S1005), if not reached (NO in S1005), the process is completed, and if it is reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed) (closed). S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing per normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag per normal figure is set (S1010) to end the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the non-time reduction state, and is set to "0" in the non-time reduction state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the end flag for hitting the normal figure is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed, so that the hit in the normal figure is hit. The end flag is turned off (S1011), the normal figure hit flag is turned off (S1012), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S206) after the normal figure operation process (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 20, the processes related to the special symbol display 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) are divided into five stages, and these are divided into five stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage of. Then, when the "special figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "2" (S1101). NO, YES for S1103), processing during special symbol change (S1104) is performed, and if the "special symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105), the special symbol is confirmed. If processing (S1106) is performed and the "special figure operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) as a jackpot game. If the "special figure operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) as a small hit game is performed. The special figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) is “0” (S1201). .. Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the second starting port 21 is not stored, the first start is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1) is “0” (S1206). Then, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20 is not stored, the image is displayed. It is determined whether or not the process of using the display screen 7a of the display device 7 as the standby screen (the demo screen for waiting for customers is being executed) is being performed (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process is completed. If not (NO in S1211), the standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, when one or more random number counter values acquired due to entering the second starting port 21 are stored. , The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) are performed in this order. Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201 and NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second starting port 21. Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memories of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20, the special figure 1 hit / miss judgment process (S1207) and the special figure 1 variation described later will be described. The pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in the first embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure hold is performed only when the second special figure hold is "0" (when YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). Then, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit that is more profitable for the player than the hit / fail judgment based on the first special figure hold (FIG. 8 (B). )).

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure 2 hit / miss determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest region of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the first one of the second special figure hold). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the oldest stored) stored in the corresponding RAM area) is read out (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not in the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state (the jackpot determination values are "3" and "" in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A)). A hit / fail judgment is made based on 397 ”) (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in the high probability state (YES in S1302), the hit / fail judgment is performed based on the big hit determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1307). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

When the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1309) is determined to be "big hit" (YES in S1304), the value (label-TRND-AS) of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type is read out and shown in FIG. 8 (B). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table (S1310), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1311), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1312), and the process is completed. In the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined as a big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1), any one of the 15R first big hit, the 15R second big hit, and the 2R third big hit is executed. Further, when the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, all of them are 15R fourth big hits (FIG. 8 (B)).

Further, the big hit flag includes a long hit flag that is turned on when the type of big hit is 15R first big hit or 15R second big hit, and a short hit flag that is turned on when the type of big hit is 2R third big hit. Here, the round display 45 is composed of two LEDs, a 2R lamp and a 15R lamp, and when the 2R third jackpot is set and the short hit flag is turned ON, the 2R third jackpot symbol is displayed. The 2R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is such as "2R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: lighting, Δ: extinguishing). Further, when the long hit flag is turned on as any of the 15R 1st jackpot, the 15R 2nd jackpot, and the 15R 4th jackpot, the 15R lamp lights up at the timing when the corresponding jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Is displayed. Specifically, the display mode is as shown in "2R Δ15R ▲".

On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1307) is not "big hit" (NO in S1304), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S1305). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches any of the small hit determination values "101" to "105" (FIG. 8 (A)). .. Then, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (NO in S1305), the out-of-order symbol is determined (S1308), and the process is completed. If it is determined to be a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the small hit flag is turned ON (S1306), and the process is completed. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not it is a small hit may be provided separately from the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) after the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (whether or not the time saving flag is ON) (S1401). Then, if it is not in the time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in the non-time saving state, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402), and if it is ON (YES in S1402), it is a medium jackpot in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the table (the portion corresponding to the non-time saving state and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) (S1403). .. If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, the non-time saving medium big hit table is divided according to whether the big hit is a long hit (15R big hit) or a short hit (2R big hit). However, since this process is a variable pattern selection process for the special figure 2, the big hit won in the lottery of the special figure 2 is only the 15R fourth big hit (long hit). Therefore, the portion referred to in this process is always the location of the long hit, and the fluctuation pattern P1 or the fluctuation pattern P2 is selected. The table for medium and large hits in the non-time saving state does not have to be divided into a long hit table and a short hit table. This also applies to the table for medium and large hits in a time-saving state, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1405). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), the variation is made with reference to the non-time saving state medium / small hit table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the non-time saving state and small hit). Pattern A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern P4 is always selected.

If the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is the reach establishment random number value (S1406). As shown in FIG. 8C, the reach establishment random number values are “0” to “5” in the time saving state and “0” to “13” in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when the time is off than the non-time-saving state. This is to accelerate the digestion speed of the special figure hold by allowing more non-reach effect deviations with a short fluctuation time to be selected in the time saving state.

When the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is the reach establishment random number value (YES in S1406), that is, when the reach is out of reach, the table for out of reach in the non-time saving state (variation shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value by referring to the non-time saving state and the portion corresponding to the reach / non-reach state in the pattern table (S1407). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P5 or P6 is selected.

If the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is not a reach-established random number value (NO in S1406), that is, if there is no reach, the table for no reach loss during the non-time saving state (variation pattern shown in FIG. 9). The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to the non-time saving state and the part corresponding to the reach non-existence in the table (S1408). When this reach does not come off, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "3" or "4", a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is "0" to "2" is selected. It is supposed to be done. In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P7 or P8 is selected.

Further, in S1401, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (YES in S1401), as shown in FIG. 24, the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is the table for the time saving state (the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The process (S1410 to S1416) is performed in the same flow as in steps S1402 to S1609 except that the part corresponding to the time saving state) is set. That is, if it is a big hit, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and the big hit in FIG. 9, if it is a small hit, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and the small hit in FIG. Based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and reach non-off in FIG. 9, and refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state and reach non-off in FIG. 9 if there is no reach. And select the fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern table during the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls when the reach is not off is the number of reserved balls "2". ~ Works when "4". That is, the shortening variation is more likely to be selected than in the non-time saving state. Further, when the long hit is won among the big hits, the fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than in the non-time saving state. That is, the fluctuation pattern table in the time saving state is a table in which the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table in the non-time saving state.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, another process (S1404) shown in FIG. 23 is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is one lower side (for example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when stored up to the upper limit number). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

In the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 21, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" and the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206). , Special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1207), the processes (S1601 to S1609) are performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. 22. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

However, since this process is related to the special figure 1, in S1601, the lowest area of the first special figure hold storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, in the type determination of the jackpot in S1608, there is a possibility that any of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, and the 2R third jackpot is determined (FIG. 8 (B)). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (special figure 1) of FIG. 8B, the distribution rate of each jackpot is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 50% for the 15R second jackpot, and 2R third jackpot. Is 10%. When it is determined as the 15R first jackpot or the 15R second jackpot in the jackpot type determination, the long hit flag is turned ON as the jackpot flag in step S1609. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2R third big hit, the short hit flag is turned ON as the big hit flag in S1609.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1720) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. 23 and 24. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

However, since this process is related to Special Figure 1, if YES in S1702 (Fig. 27) (that is, when the jackpot flag is ON), the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot or 15R first jackpot). It is determined whether or not it is one of the two big hits (S1703). If it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S1703), refer to the 15R jackpot table in the non-time saving state (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the non-time saving state and the long hit), and the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern P1 or the fluctuation pattern P2 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1703 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S1703), that is, when it is a 2R third jackpot, the 2R jackpot table in the non-time saving state (the non-time saving state and the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the part corresponding to the short hit (S1706). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern P3 is selected.

Further, in this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process, even when YES in S1712 (FIG. 28) (that is, when the jackpot flag is ON), the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot or 15R second jackpot). (S1713). Then, in the case of a 15R jackpot (YES in S1713), the fluctuation pattern random number counter is referred to in the 15R jackpot table in the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state and the long hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on the value (S1714). Specifically, any of the fluctuation patterns P9 to P11 is selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1713 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S1713), that is, when it is a 2R third jackpot, the 2R jackpot table in the time saving state (the time saving state and the short hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to (the part corresponding to) (S1715). Specifically, the variation pattern P12 is selected.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, after the variation pattern is selected (S1704, S1706, S1709, S1710, S1711, S1714, S1715, S1718, S1719, S1720), other processes (S1705, FIG. 27) are performed. To finish this process. In the other processing (S1705), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the first special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process.

After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 21, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), the fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S1903), if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (S1904). S1905). When the probability change counter is determined to be "0" in S1905, the probability change flag is turned off and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and when it is determined that the probability variation counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

Then, in S1907, when it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907) and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the time saving for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is counted. The counter value is subtracted by 1 (S1908), it is determined whether or not the time saving counter value is "0" (S1909), and if it is "0" (YES in S1909), the time saving flag is turned off (S1910). Proceed to the processing of S1911. Further, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol winning / failing determination random number and the big hit type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is completed.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot, or 15R fourth jackpot) (S2002). ..

And if it is a 15R jackpot (that is, if the long hit flag is ON), the round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening one round once, one round is from opening the big winning opening to closing). The value of the round counter that counts the number of times is set to "15", and as an opening pattern of the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36), if it is the 15R first big hit, the 15R first An opening pattern for a big hit (see FIG. 6) is set, and if it is a 15R second big hit, an opening pattern for a 15R second big hit (see FIG. 6) is set (S2003).

If it is not a 15R jackpot in S2002 (that is, if the short hit flag is ON), the jackpot type is 2R second jackpot, so the value of the round counter is set to "2" and the jackpot prize device (first jackpot). As the opening pattern of the winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36), the opening pattern for the 2R second big hit (see FIG. 6) is set (S2004).

After finishing the processing of S2003 or S2004, in order to start the big hit game, set the big hit opening command (S2005), start the opening effect of the big hit game (S2006), and set the special figure operation status to "4". (S2007).

Further, when it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S2008). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S2008), the value of the small hit opening counter that counts the number of times the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is opened during the small hit game is set to "2". At the same time, an opening pattern for small hits (see FIG. 6) is set as an opening pattern of the large winning devices (first large winning device 31 and second large winning device 36) (S2009).

After finishing the processing of S2009, in order to start the small hit game, the opening command of the small hit is set (S2010), the opening production of the small hit game is started (S2011), and the special figure operation status is set to "5". Set (S2012). If the small hit flag is not ON in S2008 (NO in S2008), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game will start, so the special figure operation status is set to "1" and the process is completed.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON (S2101), and when it is determined to be ON (YES in S2101), the probability change flag is turned OFF. (S2102). Further, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103), and if it is determined to be ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In the first embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time saving state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the jackpot winning devices (first jackpot winning device 31 and second jackpot winning device 36) have been opened (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is determined whether or not the jackpot (first jackpot 30 or second jackpot 35) is open (S2106). If it is not open (NO in S2106), it is time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the big hit has passed 1 It is determined whether or not the time to start the round has been reached, or the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and the time to start the next round (next open) has been reached (S2107).

If the judgment result of S2107 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result of S2107 is YES, it is determined whether or not the executed round corresponds to either the first round or the second round (S2108). This may be determined by using the value of the round counter for each jackpot type, or may be determined by providing a round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed separately. If neither the first round nor the second round (ie, any of the 3rd to 15th rounds) (NO in S2108), proceed to S2110 and follow the opening pattern according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 6). The first big winning opening 30 is opened. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the first round or the second round (YES in S2108), the V validity period setting process (S2109) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S2110, and the opening pattern according to the type of jackpot (Fig. 6). Refer to) to open the second prize opening 35.

In the V validity period setting process (S2109), the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the opening of the second special winning opening 35 and for several seconds after the closing of the second special winning opening 35 in the first or second round. Set to the period for determining validity (corresponding to the first period). In the first embodiment, the period other than this (including during a small hit or when the special game is not executed) is a period (corresponding to the second period) in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is judged to be invalid. Is set to. Here, determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a (specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later). (Refer to steps S2401 to S2403), and determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned on even if the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is detected. Is.

Here, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON, the game state display 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability state. Is notified. Specifically, the game status indicator 46 is composed of three LEDs of "a1a2a3". Then, in the first embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). Further, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode is "a1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■". Then, when the big hit game is completed and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □". Further, the lighting control timing of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the big hit game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area, the display mode of "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" remains. , "A1 ■ a2 ■ a3 ■" may be displayed at the timing of transition to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, and "a1 □ a2 □ a3 □" may be displayed at the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. ..

That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned on outside the V valid period (V invalid). The V flag is not turned on when the V passage is detected (during the period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (game state setting process (FIG. 33) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, that is, it is prevented from being illegally set to the high probability state.

In addition, if there is a V pass at the 1st or 2R in the 15R 1st jackpot or the 2R 3rd jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to a high probability state, while the V passage occurs during the small hit. Even if there is, if the game state before the small hit game is the normal state, the game state after the small hit game is also set to the normal state so that the winning / failing determination probability does not change before and after the big hit game.

In the first embodiment, in the V validity period setting process (S2109), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is set to the period (first period) that is determined to be effective even when the 15R second jackpot is hit. However, as another aspect, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the first period may not be set at the 1st and 2nd rounds. That is, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the 1st and 2nd Rs may be set as the second period. In the big hit game related to the 15R second big hit, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 is set to 0.1 seconds, which is an extremely short time, so there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the second big winning opening 35. It is extremely low, but if you set it in the second period, you will not turn on the V flag even if you should hit the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the V flag from being turned on illegally or the V flag from being turned on due to a rare entry. In this embodiment, the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is enabled in the first round or the second round, but the location of the round is not limited to this.

If the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is open in S2106 (YES in S2106), the maximum number of balls that can be entered in the big winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls. It is determined whether or not (10 pieces per round in this Example 1) has been reached (S2111). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2111), has it reached the time to close the big prize opening (that is, has the predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) passed since the big winning opening was opened? Whether or not) is determined (S2112). Then, if the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when the specified number of balls has been reached (YES in S2111) or when the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112), that is, one of the two round end conditions is satisfied. If this happens, the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is closed (S2113). Then, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined that it is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined to be "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) and the jackpot ending effect is started (S2117) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2118), and the process is completed. If the round counter is a long hit (15R big hit), it will be "0" if the big winning opening is opened 15 times, and if it is a short hit (2R big hit), the big winning opening will be opened twice. When executed, it becomes "0".

If the jackpot end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether or not the execution time of the jackpot ending effect has elapsed (S2119), and the ending time has elapsed. If not (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2119), after turning off the jackpot end flag (S2120), the game state setting process (S2121) described later is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2123), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

[Game status setting process]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned ON in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later. Then, if the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2202), "140" is set in the probability change counter (S2203), the V flag is turned OFF (S2204), and the processing of S2205 is performed. move on. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not to set the gaming state after the big hit game to the high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is turned ON in this gaming state setting process.

On the other hand, if the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), the time reduction flag is turned ON (S2209), the time reduction counter is set to "100" (S2210), and the process is completed without turning the probability change flag ON. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a low probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state (that is, a low probability high base state). In this low-accuracy high-based state, the variation display of the special symbol is performed 100 times (the total number of variation display times of the first special symbol and the variation display count of the second special symbol is 100 times). And the next big hit will occur, and it will end when either of the conditions is met. Further, the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter count the total number of times the fluctuation display number of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display number of the second special symbol are added.

In S2205, it is determined whether or not the completed jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot. Then, when it is determined that it is not a 15R jackpot, that is, it is a 2R third jackpot (NO in S2205), then the gaming state before the jackpot game, that is, the gaming state when the 2R third jackpot is reached is whether or not the time is shortened. (S2208). If it is determined that the time reduction state has not been achieved (NO in S2208), the process ends without turning on the time reduction flag. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a high probability state, a non-time saving state of the special symbol, and a low base state (that is, a high probability low base state). This high-accuracy-low-base state ends when either of the conditions that the special symbol fluctuates 140 times and the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2205 that the completed jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2205), and in S2208, the game state when the 2R third jackpot is reached is in a time-saving state. If it is determined that the time was (YES in S2208), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2206), "140" is set in the time saving counter (S2207), and the process is completed. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a high probability state, a time saving state of the special symbol, and a high base state (that is, a high probability high base state). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either of the conditions that the special symbol fluctuates 140 times and the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

Further, when the 2R third big hit and the V flag is turned ON during the big hit game, it is the big hit game that performs the process (S2208) of determining whether the game state before the big hit game is the time saving state. This is to make the operating state of the front and rear time saving function and the operating state of the high base function the same as the small hit. If these operating states are different between the small hit and the 2R 3rd big hit, even if it is difficult to recognize which hit is due to the opening pattern of the big winning opening, which hit is determined by the subsequent operating state. Because it will be done. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the small hit and the 2R third big hit by the opening pattern of the big winning opening, and also by the operating state of the time saving function and the high base generating function that occur thereafter. If the V flag is simply ON without confirming whether the time reduction state is set, the time reduction flag may be turned ON.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the large winning devices (first large winning device 31 and second large winning device 36) have been opened in the small hit game.

If the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), whether the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is open (that is, whether the big winning device is open) ) Is determined (S2302). If it is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. It is determined whether the time to start the first opening has been reached, or whether the time of the interval between the multiple openings has elapsed and the time to start the next opening has been reached (S2303).

If the judgment result of S2303 is NO, the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the determination result of S2303 is YES, the V invalid period setting process (S2304) is performed, and then the process proceeds to S2305 to open the second large winning opening 35 according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6).

In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated for a few seconds during the opening of the second large winning opening 35 and after the closing of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game. Set to the judgment period (second period). Further, in the first embodiment, a period other than the period specified in the valid period in the above-mentioned V valid period setting process (S2109) is set as an invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is confirmed whether the valid period is set, that is, whether the invalid period is set. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the V timer (provided in the RAM of the main control board 80) that measures the passage of the V validity period by countdown is set to "0" (that is, the state without the validity period). do. If the V timer is not "0", set the V timer to "0". It should be noted that the V timer may be set to "0", that is, set to a state without a valid period without confirming whether or not the V timer is "0". As a result, even if V passes during the small hit, if the game state before the small hit game is the normal state, the game state after the small hit game is prevented from shifting to the high probability state. In the first embodiment, since the period other than the period specified in the valid period in the above-mentioned V valid period setting process (S2109) is the invalid period, the process of S2304 may be omitted.

If the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30 or 2nd big winning opening 35) is open in S2302, (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the big winning opening during the 2 times opening, that is, 2 It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls entered in the opening of the number of times has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306), has it reached the time to close the big prize opening (that is, has the predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) passed since the big winning opening was opened? Whether or not) is determined (S2307). Then, if the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, if the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the two openings has reached the specified number of balls (YES in S2506), the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is closed (2nd large winning opening 35). S2314), shift to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the large winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is closed (S2308). Then, the value of the small hit opening counter is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that it is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process is terminated as it is in order to start the next opening.

On the other hand, if it is determined to be "0" in S2310 (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end process of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311) and the small hit ending effect is started (S2312). Then, the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the process is completed. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened twice.

In S2301, if the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), since the opening of two times has been completed, it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has passed (S2315), and the ending time. If has not passed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the small hit flag is turned off (S2317), and the special figure operation status is set to "1". Set (S2318) and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

At the start of the small hit game, the probability change flag and the time saving flag are not switched from ON to OFF. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process (S2121, FIG. 34) is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure operation process (S206) and then the specific area sensor detection process (S207). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 35, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). If it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2401), the process ends. When it is determined that there is detection in S2401 (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not it is in the V valid period (S2402). The V valid period is a period set in the V valid period setting process (S2109) in the above-mentioned special electric accessory process 1 (FIG. 32). The V validity period is set in the first and second rounds of the jackpot game.

If it is determined in S2402 that the V is valid (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the jackpot game currently being executed is a 2R jackpot (2R third jackpot). Is determined (S2404). Then, if it is determined that it is not a 2R jackpot (NO in S2404), that is, if it is a 15R jackpot, the first V pass command is set (S2405), and the process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a 2R jackpot (YES in S2404), the second V pass command is set (S2406), and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V-pass command to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub-control board 90 executes the game effect in the effect symbol display area or the like according to the type of the received V-pass command. ..

If it is determined in S2402 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2402), the third V passage command is set (S2407) without turning on the V flag, and the process ends. The first V-passing command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to perform V-passing notification control. On the other hand, the second V-passing command and the third V-passing command are commands for not causing the sub-control board 90 to perform V-passing notification control in principle. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 is a means for switching the validity / invalidity of the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 by executing such a specific area sensor detection process (S207) or V validity period setting process (S2109). Functions as (specific area state switching means).

[Holded ball number processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S208) after the specific area sensor detection processing (S207). In the reserved ball number processing (S208), as shown in FIG. 36, first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out (the number of reserved ball number). S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502).

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S209) after the hold ball number process (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), as shown in FIG. 37, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if there is an input of a power off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is playing a game, the number of reserved balls is some, and the number of remaining fluctuations of the probability change / time reduction is some. Etc.) are stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 47. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 38 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. .. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, the CPU initialization process is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (at the time of turning on the power), and are not executed after that.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers for determining the effect include a random number for determining the advance effect that determines the advance effect and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding the random values one by one at the time of updating, it is possible to add two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In the first embodiment, the random numbers for determining the advance notice effect include a random number for determining the conversation advance notice, a random number for determining the step-up advance notice, a random number for determining the pseudo-variation advance notice, a random number for determining the moving part advance notice, and a random number for determining the advance notification effect. The advance notice effect to be executed is determined by using the acquisition values of the random numbers for determining the advance notice effect and the advance notice determination tables of FIGS. 49 and 50.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. Execute the production (directed design game production, special game production associated with the big hit game and the small hit game, etc.). The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed.

[Receive interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), as shown in FIG. 39, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is sent to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. Determine if it has been entered (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 40, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). .. Subsequently, a lamp data output process for outputting the lamp data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later is performed (S4202). Next, a drive data output process for creating and outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 is performed (S4203). Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process described later is performed (S4301). Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4302). Subsequently, a switch process for setting the display contents and the like of the display screen 7a is performed based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process (S4303). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4304).

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, in the reception command analysis process (S4301), first, it is determined whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 has received the start input command from the main control board 80 (main control unit) ( S4401), when it is determined that the start ball entry command has been received (YES in S4401), then the ball entry start processing (S4402), which will be described later, is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. If it is determined that the start ball entry command has not been received by S4401 (NO in S4401), the process proceeds to S4403 without performing the effect start process at the time of ball entry.

In S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control unit (S4403), and if it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing described later is performed (S4404). , Move to the processing of S4405. If it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received by S4403 (NO in S4403), the process shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation production start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not there is an unexecuted advance notice effect (game effect) (S4405), and if it is determined that there is an unexecuted advance notice effect (YES in S4405), the advance notice effect, etc. execution processing described later is performed. (S4406) and move to the processing of S4407. If it is determined in S4405 that there is no unexecuted advance notice effect (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without executing the advance notice effect. Here, "not yet executed notice effect, etc." refers to a game effect whose execution timing has not yet arrived, among the advance notice effects, etc. that have been decided to be executed by the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), etc. say. These set game effects that have not been executed will be executed in order when the execution timing determined for each game effect arrives.

In S4407, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control unit (S4407), and if it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4407), the variation effect end processing described later is performed (S4408). Move to S4409 processing. If it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has not been received in S4407 (NO in S4407), the process shifts to the processing of S4409 without performing the fluctuation production end processing.

Subsequently, in S4409, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control unit (S4409), and when it is determined that the opening command has been received (YES in S4409), the special game effect selection process described later is performed (S4410). ), Move to the processing of S4411. If it is determined that the opening command has not been received by S4409 (NO in S4409), the process proceeds to S4411 without performing the special game effect selection process. In S4411, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main control unit (S4411), and if it is determined that the ending command has been received (YES in S4411), the ending effect selection process is performed (S4412), and the process of S4413 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4411 that the ending command has not been received (NO in S4411), the process proceeds to S4413 without performing the ending effect selection process.

Subsequently, if it is determined whether or not the first V passage command has been received from the main control unit (S4413) and it is determined that the first V passage command has been received (YES in S4413), the V passage notification command is set (S4414). ), Move to the processing of S4415. The first V passage command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 15R first jackpot. When the V-passage notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) or the like by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads predetermined image information from the ROM of the image control board 100. Then, characters such as "V pass!" Are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As a result, the player is notified that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high probability state. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4413 that the first V passage command has not been received (NO in S4413), the process proceeds to the process of S4415 without setting the V passage notification command.

It should be noted that displaying the character "V passage!" Is one of the V passage notification modes, and other display contents (for example, displaying an object image imitating the character "V" or "probability change GET"". The passage of V may be notified by displaying the characters of, etc.). As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the game state after the big hit game (special game) being executed will be a high probability state.

Subsequently, in S4415, when the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the second V passage command has been received from the main control unit (S4415), and determines that the second V passage command has not been received (NO in S4415). ), Determine whether or not the third V passage command has been received (S4417). Then, when it is determined that the second V passage command has been received in S4415 (YES in S4415) and when it is determined in S4417 that the third V passage command has been received (YES in S4417), V passes. Set the non-notification command (S4416) and move to the processing of S4418. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4417 that the third V passage command has not been received (NO in S4417), the process proceeds to S4418 without setting the V passage non-notification command. In S4418, as other processing, processing based on a reception command other than the above-mentioned command (for example, a normal symbol fluctuation start command or a normal symbol fluctuation stop command) is performed, and the processing is completed. Here, the second V passage command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V valid period in the 2R third big hit. The third V passage command is a command from the main control board 80 to notify the sub control board 90 that the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the V invalid period such as during a small hit.

When the V-pass non-notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 or the like by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays "V-pass!" Or the like on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display is controlled on a screen in which there is no display of characters indicating that the V has passed (that is, a screen in which there is no notification of the passage of V). In other words, the V-passing non-notification mode is adopted. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the gaming ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 2R third big hit or small hit, that is not notified to the player.

The command to be set in the above-mentioned specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) may be limited to the first V pass command, and the second V pass command and the third V pass command may not be set. In this case, the received command analysis process (S4301) does not execute the above-mentioned S4415 to S4417. Even with this configuration, the pachinko gaming machine can be used to notify the player only when V has passed during the V valid period in the 15R first jackpot. That is, it is not necessary to set a command (V-passage non-notification command) when the effect for notifying V-passage is not performed. However, it is possible to increase the stability of the image control by setting a command and controlling the image control board 100 based on the command as in this embodiment.

[Production start processing at the time of entry]
The effect start processing (S4402) at the time of ball entry is a process of executing a start ball entry command indicating that the ball has entered the start port from the main control unit. By this process, the image display device 7 Display control (control regarding the number of displays and changes in the display mode of the effect hold) of the effect hold (first effect hold 9a and second effect hold 9b) displayed on the display screen 7a of Occasionally, a so-called look-ahead effect (also referred to as "advance effect" or "advance notice") is performed based on the acquired information acquired by the main control unit. The look-ahead effect is a notice effect for starting the effect (game effect) before starting the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the predetermined special symbol hit / miss determination. That is, the look-ahead effect is a variation display of the effect symbol (special symbol) that is executed before starting the variation display (also referred to as “the variation”) of the effect symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the predetermined special symbol hit / fail determination. It is executed along with (also called "preliminary fluctuation"). In addition, the advance notice effect (including the look-ahead effect) means that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) indicating the result of the predetermined special symbol hit / fail judgment becomes a big hit (stops and displays in the big hit mode / big hit symbol). It is an effect that shows (suggests) the possibility before the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, in the effect start processing (S4402) at the time of entering the ball, first, the processing of turning on the specific flag is performed in S5001, and the process shifts to the processing of S5002. Here, the "specific flag" of the first embodiment is in a state (high) in which the load of the control processing performed by the sub control unit 90 (also referred to as the "game effect control unit") is relatively high (the amount of control processing is large). It is a flag indicating the load state). Then, this "specific flag" is turned on when the ball entering effect start process is executed, and turned off when the ball entering effect start process is completed. That is, in the first embodiment, the processing amount of the control (effect control process, notice effect control process) related to the game effect of the sub control unit (game effect control unit) is greater than the predetermined amount during the execution of the effect start process at the time of entering the ball. It is said that there are many periods. In the first embodiment, the advance notice determination table used in the setting process such as the advance notice effect, which will be described later, is different depending on the state (ON or OFF) of this "specific flag". The state in which the specific flag is ON is also referred to as a "high load state" or "second control state", and the state in which the specific flag is OFF is also referred to as a "low load state" or "first control state".

Next, in the S5002, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-effect determination random number acquisition process (S5002) for acquiring a pre-effect determination random number for the pre-effect determination, and shifts to the process of S5003. At the timing when the start-in ball command is received from the main control unit 80, the processing of S5002 is performed, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from a random number for determining a preliminary effect (not shown). Further, in the pre-effect determination process (S5005) described later, whether or not to execute the pre-effect based on the acquired value, and if it is executed, the execution mode and the like are determined. The S5003 analyzes the start-in ball command received from the main control unit by the effect control microcomputer 91, and shifts to the processing of the S5004. The start-in ball command includes a variation pattern specifying command (information for specifying the variation pattern to be executed) that can specify the variation pattern to be selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ing. In addition, hold information for specifying the number of acquired information (number of stored items, number of holds) stored in the current 1st special figure hold storage unit 85a and 2nd special figure hold storage unit 85b, and the current gaming state are specified. The game state information to be played, the judgment result (preliminary judgment result) of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the symbol information for designating the hit type, and the like are included.

In S5004, a table for determining the pre-production is set (S5004), and the set pre-production determination table, the information included in the start entry command, and the random number for pre-production determination acquired in S5002 are displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-effect, and if so, which effect mode the pre-effect is to be executed (S5005), and the process proceeds to S5006.

The S5006 controls the display of the effect hold (first effect hold and second effect hold) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and shifts to the process of S5007. Specifically, the number of acquired information stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is calculated based on the hold information analyzed by the start entry command analysis process (S5003). In order to show the player, control is performed to display the first effect hold and the second effect hold, which indicate the same number as the number of the stored acquired information. As a result, the player can easily grasp the current number of holds.

Further, by changing the display modes of the first effect hold and the second effect hold, or by changing the display modes of the first effect hold and the second effect hold to a special display mode different from the normal display mode. When showing the possibility that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol related to the effect hold will be a specific result (big hit) before starting the variable display of the effect symbol (when executing the pre-effect), the effect of S5006 Performs the corresponding display control process in the hold display process.

In S5007, the specific flag is turned off and the production start process at the time of entering the ball is completed. By determining that this specific flag is OFF, it is possible to determine that the effect start processing at the time of entering the ball is not being executed, that is, that the control processing amount related to the game effect performed by the sub control unit is a predetermined amount. It is possible. Here, whether or not "the control processing amount related to the game effect is a predetermined amount" means whether or not the control processing amount is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value (the control processing amount is within a predetermined range), and in this embodiment, it is actually Rather than measuring the control processing amount, a specific control process (“production start processing at the time of ball entry” in Example 1) is being executed, which generally increases the control processing amount (also simply referred to as “processing amount”). It is possible to easily judge by judging whether or not it is. Therefore, when a predetermined specific control process is performed, it is considered that "the amount of control process related to the game effect is larger than the predetermined amount", and the corresponding control process for the high load state is executed. do. As another aspect, a measuring means for actually measuring the load of the CPU of the sub-control unit is provided, and when the value (load) measured by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the corresponding high load state is used. It may be the one that executes the control process of.

[Variation production start processing]
As shown in FIG. 45, in the variable effect start process (S4404), first, in S4501, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the effect determination random numbers such as the advance notice effect determination random number and the effect symbol determination random number. Performs acquisition processing (S4501). Specifically, in this embodiment, as the random numbers for determining the advance notice effect, the random numbers for determining the conversation advance notice effect (also referred to as "random numbers for determining the first advance notice effect") and the random numbers for determining the step-up advance notice effect ("random number for determining the second advance notice effect"). Random number for determining pseudo-variation notice (also referred to as "random number for determining third notice effect"), random number for determining moving part notice (also referred to as "random number for determining fourth notice effect"), and advance notification effect decision It has a random number for use (“random number for determining the fifth notice effect”), and at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, the processing of S4501 is performed, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is obtained from each random number. Will be acquired. Further, in the advance notice effect setting process (S4506) described later, the advance notice effect or the like to be executed according to the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) is determined based on the acquired value.

Next, in S4502, the fluctuation start command is analyzed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the information for designating the fluctuation pattern includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P17) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current gaming state, the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. (See FIG. 8). The variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect in the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. Specifically, the images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as different characters, items, and background images, and the effect symbol game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode. Further, when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects may be executed depending on the effect mode. In this embodiment, the effect mode A is executed when the low accuracy and low base state is controlled, the effect mode B is executed when the low accuracy and high base state is controlled, and the effect mode C is the high accuracy and high. Executed when controlled to the base state. Therefore, by confirming which of the production modes A to C, the player can grasp the current gaming state.

Further, the effect mode D or the effect mode E is executed when the high accuracy low base state or the low accuracy low base state is controlled. Therefore, when the effect mode is D or E, even if the player confirms the effect mode, he / she can grasp whether the probability state of the special symbol winning / failing determination is in the high probability state or the low probability state (normal state). It's difficult to do. In that sense, the effect modes D and E can be said to be probability non-notification modes.

Next, in the S4504, for determining the variable effect pattern (also referred to as “effect pattern”) of the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. controlled by the effect control microcomputer 91. Set the table (S4504). Specifically, as a table for determining the variation effect pattern, there is an effect symbol variation mode determination table for determining the variation mode of the effect symbol, although not shown, based on the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. Set. In this embodiment, different effect symbol variation mode determination tables are set depending on the game state and the effect mode.

Next, in S4505, based on the variation effect pattern table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern that matches the specified variation pattern and corresponds to the effect mode indicated by the referenced mode status is selected (S4505). Further, in S4505, among the variation effect patterns, the variation mode of the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (the mode of the effect symbol game effect) is mainly determined. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) and when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect and When the character effect is not executed (reach non-effect symbol game effect) is set.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the variation mode of the effect pattern, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, super reach C, and character The effect is set, and in S4505, which of these effects is performed or which of these effects is not performed (this is also referred to as "normal variation") is determined based on the effect symbol variation mode determination table. Will be done.

Then, when the reach effect symbol game effect is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the effect symbol variation mode determination table. In addition, when the reach A, reach B, or reach C (also referred to as "normal reach") is executed in the case where the play effect with reach is executed, the "reach flag" is turned ON and the "super reach flag" is executed. Is turned off, and when super reach A, super reach B, or super reach C is executed, the "super reach flag (also referred to as" SP reach flag ")" is turned on and the "reach flag" is turned off. In addition, when the effect with reach effect symbol game effect is not executed, the "reach flag" and the "super reach flag" are turned off. It is assumed that the state of these flags is determined and the advance notification effect described later is performed.

Here, when the super reach effect is executed as the game effect, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that when the normal reach effect is executed. That is, it can be said that the super reach production is a game production having a higher jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot, feasibility of a jackpot game) than the reach (normal reach) production. Next, in S4506, setting processing such as a notice effect described later is performed. In the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), which of the advance notice effect types to be described later is mainly executed among the variable effect patterns based on the effect determination random number acquired in S4501. To determine. In addition, an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as a "stop effect symbol") is determined. By these processes (S4505 and S4506), the variation effect pattern is determined.

Next, in S4507, a variable effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect or the like is set based on the variable effect pattern selected in S4505 and S4506 (S4507), and the variable effect start process is terminated. Further, when the variable effect start command set in S4505 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined effect image from the ROM of the image control board 100. It is read out and the effect symbol game effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is doublet of an odd number such as "777" when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is 15R first jackpot, and when it is 15R second jackpot. Is doublet with an even numbered symbol such as "666". In addition, when one of the three production symbols such as "787" is out of reach, one of the three production symbols is different from the other production symbols, and when it is out of reach, three productions such as "635" are produced. At least one of the symbols is selected so that the other effect symbols are different from each other. Further, in the case of the 2R 3rd big hit and the small hit, a predetermined chance eye such as "135" or a dedicated symbol for the 2R 3rd big hit and the small hit such as "3 ☆ 3" may be stopped and displayed. That is, the same effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the time of the 2R third big hit and at the time of the small hit. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the 2R third specific big hit or the small hit is obtained only by checking the stopped display of the effect symbol. It should be noted that the above-mentioned stop display mode of the effect symbol is an example, and when a big hit occurs, what is stopped and displayed as the stop effect symbol can be appropriately changed.

[Setting processing such as notice production]
As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, in the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), first, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned "specific flag" is ON (S4922). Then, when it is determined that the specific flag is ON (YES in S4922), that is, when it is determined that the load of the sub control unit is high (the amount of control processing related to the game effect performed by the sub control unit is large). In, a notice determination table for a high load state shown in FIG. 53 is set as a notice determination table for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and, if so, which advance notice effect is to be executed. S4923), shift to the processing of S4901. Since a plurality of advance notice determination tables are set as the advance notice determination table for the high load state, it is also referred to as a "notice determination table group". On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific flag is OFF (NO in S4922), the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is set as the advance notice determination table (S4924), and the process proceeds to S4901. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is used in the normal load state except for the state where the load of the sub control unit is particularly high, that is, the state in which the specific flag is ON. Use to determine the notice production.

More specifically, a notice to be used from the notice determination table shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 based on the state of the specific flag (ON or OFF) and the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. The decision table is to be set. For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern 1)" and the specific flag is OFF, the notice determination table is used for the low load state shown in FIG. The conversation notice decision table for P1 and P9, the step-up notice decision table for P1 and P9, the cut-in notice decision table for P1 and P9, and the movable part notice decision table for P1 and P9 will be set.

Next, by the processing after S4901, the special symbol (effect symbol) fluctuates based on the effect determination random number (random number for advance notice effect determination, random number for effect symbol determination) acquired in S4501 and the advance notice determination table set in S4504. The notice effect to be executed during the display and the effect symbol (stop effect symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the effect symbol is changed and displayed are determined.

In S4901, any of a plurality of conversation notice effects is executed based on the value of the conversation notice determination random number acquired in S4501 and the conversation notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect (S4901), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this embodiment, there are four types of notice effects that constitute (belong to) the present notice effect type in the low load state, and one type of the advance notice effect that constitutes (belongs to) the present notice effect type in the high load state. Here, the random number for determining the conversation notice has a random number range of 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the four types of conversation notice effects is to be executed or whether the conversation notice effect is not to be executed, depending on the acquired value.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is P2 (variation pattern 2) and the specific flag is ON, the conversation notice determination for P2, P10, and P11 for the high load state shown in FIG. 53 is determined. The table is set. Then, if the value of the acquired random number for determining the conversation notice is any of "0 to 29, 60 to 99" (selection probability: 70%), the conversation notice effect is not executed. Further, when the acquired value is any of "30 to 59" (30%), the conversation notice effect of the "chance" of rank K3 is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b at a predetermined timing. As described above, in the state where the specific flag is ON (high load state), the execution mode of the conversation notice effect is only one mode of "chance". That is, it is determined whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect, and when it is determined to be executed, the "chance" conversation notice effect (specific notice effect) is always executed. Therefore, in this notice production type (conversation notice production), it can be said that the feasible notice production is fixed.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is P2 (variation pattern 2) and the specific flag is ON, it is for P2, P10, and P11 for the low load state (normal use) shown in FIG. Conversation notice decision table is set. Then, if the value of the acquired random number for determining the conversation notice is any of "0 to 19" (selection probability: 20%), the conversation notice effect is not executed. Further, when the acquired value is any of "20 to 24" (5%), the conversation notice effect of "Hello" of rank K1 is displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b at a predetermined timing. Further, if the acquired value is any of "25 to 29" (5%), the conversation notice effect of "Reach !?" of rank K2 is executed. This is a notice effect that notifies the player that there is a high possibility that reach will occur (for example, a reliability of about 50%). Further, if the acquired value is any of "30 to 59" (30%), the conversation notice effect of the "chance" of rank K3 is executed. This is a notice effect that notifies the player that there is a relatively high possibility of a big hit (for example, a reliability of about 20%). Further, if the acquired value is any of "60 to 99" (40%), the conversation notice effect of "super heat" of rank K4 is executed. This is a warning effect that notifies the player that there is a high possibility of a big hit (for example, a reliability of about 40%).

The ranks are set as K4> K3> K2> K1 in descending order of the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. Therefore, in this conversation notice production, the production mode of "super heat" related to rank K4 is the notice production showing the highest possibility of big hit (special game execution possibility). Further, since the fluctuation pattern P2 is a fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot, the feasibility of the conversation notice effect having a high jackpot reliability is set higher than the feasibility of the conversation notice effect having a low jackpot reliability. As described above, in the state where the specific flag is OFF (low load state), the execution mode of the conversation notice effect is the four modes shown in FIG. 52 (A). That is, even when it is determined that the conversation notice effect is to be executed, the notice effect in a different mode is executed depending on the acquired fluctuation pattern information and the value of the random number for determining the conversation notice.

If the S4902 determines whether or not to execute the conversation notice and determines that the conversation notice is to be executed (YES in S4902), the conversation notice flag ("first notice flag", "1st notice flag" indicating that the conversation notice is to be executed is executed. (Also referred to as "first notice information") is turned ON (S4903), the determined conversation notice effect is set (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the conversation notice is not executed (NO in S4902), the conversation notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it is left OFF) (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4906.

Next, in S4906, a plurality of step-up notices are given based on the value of the random number for step-up notice determination acquired in S4501 and the step-up notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined which of the effects is to be executed or whether the step-up notice effect is not to be executed (S4906), and the process proceeds to S4907. Further, in the present embodiment, there are five types of advance notice effects that constitute the present advance notice effect type regardless of whether the load is low or high. Here, the random number for the step-up notice determination has a random number range of 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the five types of step-up notice effects is to be executed or whether the step-up notice effect is not to be executed depending on the acquired value. do. Here, the "step-up notice effect" is an effect that changes in five stages from step 1 to step 5, and in the first embodiment, five characters (five types) perform steps 1 to step 5. One person is displayed in order, and all five people are gathered and displayed in step 5. Since this is a time-series production, it is said that the execution time becomes longer as the steps progress.

Since the specific method for determining the step-up notice effect is the same as the conversation notice effect described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The ranks are set as S5> S4> S3> S2> S1 in descending order of the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, when it is determined in S4907 that the step-up notice effect is to be executed (YES in S4907), the step-up notice flag ("second notice flag" and "second notice information" indicating that the step-up notice effect is to be executed is also used. Turn on (S4908), set the determined step-up notice effect (S4909), and shift to the processing of S4911. On the other hand, when it is determined that the step-up notice effect is not executed (NO in S4907), the step-up notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4910), and the process proceeds to S4911.

Next, in S4911, a plurality of cut-in notices are given based on the value of the random number for cut-in notice determination acquired in S4501 and the cut-in notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined which of the effects is to be executed or whether the cut-in notice effect is not to be executed (S4911), and the process proceeds to S4912. In this embodiment, there are three types of advance notice effects that constitute the present advance notice effect type in the low load state, and one type of advance notice effect that constitutes the present advance notice effect type in the high load state. Here, the random number range for the cut-in notice determination is 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the three types of cut-in notice effects is to be executed or whether the cut-in notice effect is not to be executed depending on the acquired value. do. Here, the "cut-in notice effect" is a notice effect indicating that the result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment may be a big hit, and is any of the characters A, B, or C at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the effect symbol. Is suddenly displayed (cut-in), and indicates the possibility of a big hit depending on the type and display timing of the displayed character. For example, it is assumed that the displayed character has a high possibility of becoming a big hit in the order of character C (high)> B (medium)> A (low) (special game execution possibility), and the character has a high possibility. The more it is displayed at the timing after the fluctuation display (the time closer to the stop display), the higher the possibility of becoming a big hit can be shown.

Since the specific method for determining the cut-in notice effect is the same as that of the conversation notice effect described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The ranks are set as C3> C2> C1 in descending order of the possibility of becoming a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, when it is determined in S4912 that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (YES in S4912), the cut-in notice flag ("third notice flag" and "third notice information" indicating that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed is also used. Turn on (S4913), set the determined cut-in notice effect (S4914), and shift to the processing of S4916. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed (NO in S4912), the cut-in notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4915), and the process proceeds to S4916.

Next, in S4916, a plurality of movable part notices are announced based on the value of the random number for determining the movable part notice acquired in S4501 and the cut-in notice determination table set in S4923 or S4924 (see FIG. 52 or FIG. 53). It is determined which of the effects is to be executed, or whether to execute the moving part notice effect (S4916), and the process proceeds to S4917. In this embodiment, there are three types of advance notice effects that constitute the present advance notice effect type in the low load state, and two types of advance notice effects that form the main advance notice effect type in the high load state. Here, the random number for determining the movable part notice has a random number range of 0 to 99, and it is determined which of the three types of the movable part notice effect is executed or whether the movable part notice effect is not executed depending on the acquired value. do. Here, the "movable portion advance notice effect" is an effect performed by using the movable decorative member 14 that performs a predetermined operation, and a light emitting member provided on the movable decorative member 14 or visible through the movable decorative member 14 is a predetermined embodiment. It has an effect of emitting light in, an effect of operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode, and an effect of combining light emission and operation.

Since the specific method for determining the moving part advance notice effect is the same as the conversation advance notice effect described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The ranks are set as M3> M2> M1 in descending order of the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) when the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, when it is determined in S4917 that the movable part notice effect is to be executed (YES in S4917), the movable part notice flag ("4th notice flag" and "4th notice information" indicating that the movable part notice effect is to be executed is also used. Turn on (S4918), set the determined movable part notice effect (S4919), and shift to the processing of S4921. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable part notice effect is not executed (NO in S4917), the movable part notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4920), and the process proceeds to S4921.

In S4921, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the effect symbol determination table (not shown), and the determined effect symbol (stop effect symbol) is set (S4926). ), Finish the process.

As described above, the notice determination table used in the low load state (specific flag OFF state) shown in FIG. 52 and the notice determination table used in the high load state (specific flag ON state) shown in FIG. 53 are the notices to be determined. The number of production types (conversation notice production, step-up notice production, cut-in notice production, and moving part notice production) is the same, but the number of notice productions to be decided is different. Specifically, in the notice determination table for the high load state, the number of notice effects belonging to the conversation notice effect type is reduced from 4 to 1, and the number of notice effects belonging to the step-up notice effect type remains unchanged at 5, and the cut-in The number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type has been reduced from three to one, and the number of advance notice effects belonging to the movable part advance notice effect type has been reduced from three to two. That is, the number of advance notice effects to be decided has been reduced from 15 to 9. As a result, in the high load state (specific flag ON state), the number of processes of the advance notice effect determination process (also referred to as “game effect determination process”) for determining the advance notice effect is smaller than that in the low load state (specific flag OFF state). do. That is, the control load applied to the sub-control unit by the control process (notice effect determination unit) of the advance notice effect determination process is better when the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. , It is higher than the case where the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 53.

Therefore, during the execution of the ball entry start process in which the specific flag is turned ON, the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the advance notice effect determination process by the sub control unit is increasing (becomes a high load state). A low-load control process shall be performed as the advance notice effect determination process executed by the sub-control unit. Further, when the amount of control related to the game effect other than the advance notice effect determination process by the sub control unit is not so large (in a low load state), the load of the advance notice effect determination process is relatively high, but the game effect to be determined is determined. Control processing using a large number of advance notice determination tables shall be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load on the sub-control unit (CPU of the sub-control unit) from becoming excessive, and it is possible to execute a game production (notice production, etc.) with a wide variety of tastes and enhance the game interest. It becomes possible. Further, this makes it possible to optimize the control related to the game effect executed by the sub control unit.

Further, in the first embodiment, although the number of advance notice effects to be determined in the high load state is reduced, the number of advance notice determination tables, that is, the number of feasible advance notice effect types is not reduced. As a result, during the variable display of one effect symbol, the number of game effects (number of advance notice effect types) that can be executed during the variable display is the same regardless of whether the load is low or high. (In the first embodiment, 0 to 4 notice effects (notice effect types) can be executed in any state). Further, the maximum number of game effects (maximum number of advance notice effect types) that can be executed during the variable display of 1 effect symbol is the same regardless of whether the load is low or high. The number (in the first embodiment, a maximum of four notice effects can be executed in any state). As a result, in a high load state (a state in which the specific flag is ON), the number of advance notice effects to be determined is reduced, but by maintaining the number of feasible game effects, the game interest is reduced as much as possible. It becomes possible to prevent.

However, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the notice determination table for the high load state, the notice effect types (conversation notice effect, cut-in notice effect, movable part notice effect) in which the number of notice effects is decreasing , The feasibility of the advance notice effect of the notice effect type is low. Therefore, the case of determining the advance notice effect to be executed based on the notice determination table for the low load state is 1 more than the case of determining the advance notice effect to be executed based on the advance notice determination table for the high load state. There is a high possibility that a large number of advance notice effects will be executed during the variable display. However, by not reducing the number that can be executed (maximum number), it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest as much as possible.

[Execution processing such as notice production]
Next, the execution process (S4406) such as the advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 48. The present advance notice effect execution process (S4406) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is an unexecuted advance notice effect or the like while the variation effect is being executed (the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner). First, S5101 determines whether or not the start time of the advance notice production has arrived (S5101). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has a conversation notice flag, a step-up notice flag, a cut-in notice flag, and a movable part notice flag as notice flags, and among the notice effects shown by these, the pachinko game machine 1 has not been executed. It is determined whether or not there is a notice effect for which the execution time (start time) has arrived, which is a notice effect (the execution time has not arrived). Further, the execution timing of each of these advance notice effects to be executed is set in the advance notice effect setting process (S4506), and the execution time is controlled by a predetermined timer means possessed by the sub control unit. Then, when the count value of the timer means indicates the start time of the predetermined advance notice effect, it is determined that the start time of the advance notice effect has arrived. In addition to the advance notice effect, it may be determined whether or not the start time of another game effect (lamp effect, background effect, game mode effect, etc.) has arrived, and the start and end of the game effect may be controlled.

When it is determined by S5101 that there is a notice effect whose start time has arrived (YES in S5101), a notice effect start command (conversation notice start command, step-up notice start) for executing the rehearsal effect whose start time has arrived. Command, cut-in notice start command, moving part notice start command, etc.) are set (S5102), and the process proceeds to S5103. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no notice production etc. for which the start time has arrived in S5101 (NO in S5101), the process shifts to the processing of S5103. The advance notice effect start command set in the process of S5102 is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) by the command transmission process (S4006). Then, the CPU of the image control board 100 that has received the advance notice effect start command reads out the effect image corresponding to the advance notice effect related to the advance notice effect start command from the ROM of the image control board 100, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. It is displayed on 7a, and a production pattern game production is performed.

In S5103, it is determined whether or not there is a notice effect being executed (S5103), and if it is determined that there is no notice effect being executed (NO in S5103), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an advance notice effect or the like being executed in S5103 (YES in S5103), it is then determined whether or not the end time of the execution period of the advance notice effect or the like being executed has arrived (S5104). Since the execution period is determined for each advance notice effect, the execution period is controlled by a predetermined timer means possessed by the sub-control unit, so that the count value of the timer means determines the end time of the predetermined advance notice effect being executed. When indicated, it is determined that the end time of the advance notice production has arrived.

When it is determined by S5104 that the end time of the ongoing notice effect, etc. has arrived (YES in S5104), the notice effect end command (conversation notice end command, step up) for ending the notice effect whose end time has arrived. Set the notice end command, cut-in notice end command, movable part notice end command, etc. (S5105), and finish the process. In addition, even if it is determined in S5104 that the end time has not arrived for the advance notice production, etc. being executed (NO in S5104), the process is completed. The notice effect end command set in the process of S5105 is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit) by the command transmission process (S4006). Then, the CPU of the image control board 100 that has received the advance notice effect end command finishes displaying the advance notice effect related to the advance notice effect end command, and performs the effect symbol game effect. Here, in the first embodiment, the advance notice effect or the like being executed is terminated by the advance notice effect or the like end command, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Regarding the end control of the advance notice effect, etc., for some or all of these advance notice effects, etc., the advance notice effect is started based on the advance notice effect, etc. start command, regardless of the advance notice effect, etc. end command (without providing the advance notice effect, etc. end command). Then, the advance notice production may be terminated when a predetermined production time elapses.

[Fluctuating production end processing]
As shown in FIG. 49, in the variation effect end process (S4408), first, in S4601, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the variation stop command (S4601) and refers to the mode status (S4602). Next, the S4603 determines whether or not the mode status is "1", that is, whether or not the effect mode is the effect mode A (S4603). Then, if the mode status is "1", the process proceeds to S4607. On the other hand, if the mode status is not "1", the value "M" of the effect mode counter corresponding to the current effect mode is subtracted by 1 (S4604), and whether or not the value "M" after the subtraction is "0" is determined. Judge (S4605). If it is determined in S4605 that the value "M" after subtraction is not "0" (NO in S4605), the process proceeds to S4607. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value "M" after subtraction is "0" (YES in S4605), "1" is set in the mode status to set the effect mode to the effect mode A (S4606), and S4607 Move to processing. In the S4607, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect end command for ending the effect symbol game effect (S4607), and ends the process.

[Special game production selection process]
As shown in FIG. 50, in the special game effect selection process (S4410), first, the opening command is analyzed by S4701 (S4701). Next, the S4702 performs a special game effect pattern selection process for selecting a pattern (effect mode) of the special game effect to be executed during the special game (big hit game or small hit game) based on the analyzed opening command (S4702). This special game effect is executed during the opening period before the opening of the special game opening and during the opening of the large winning opening and during the interval between the opening and opening (between rounds). Includes post-start production and. Next, in the S4703, an opening effect start command for starting the special game effect based on the special game effect pattern selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 is set (S4703), and the process is completed.

When the opening effect start command set in S4703 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM of the image control board 100. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As an opening effect, for example, an effect indicating that a right-handed game is performed is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, as a special game effect selected when executing a special game as a 2R third big hit or a small hit, in the opening effect, a game ball is aimed at the second big prize device 36 (the second big prize opening 35). It is preferable that the one that displays the fact that the player fires (the player plays the right-handed game) on the display screen 7a is selected. That is, at a predetermined timing (opening period) before the opening of the second prize-winning device 36 (second prize-winning opening 35), an effect of notifying that the right-handed game should be started is performed in advance. NS. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball will enter the second large winning opening 35 during the short opening time of the second large winning opening 35, which is a total of 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, when the special game as the first big hit of 15R is executed, the opening effect without such a notification (notification that the right-handed hit is continued before the opening of the second big winning opening 35) is selected. It has become like. Even when the special game related to the 2R third big hit or small hit is executed, the opening effect that does not include such a launch notification may be selected.

[Ending effect selection process]
As shown in FIG. 51, in the ending effect selection process (S4412), first, the ending command is analyzed in S4801 (S4801). Then, in S4802, the mode status change process is performed (S4802). In the mode status change process (S4802), if the special game currently being executed is a big hit game related to the 15R second big hit, the mode status is set to "2". Further, if the jackpot game is related to the 15R first jackpot and there is no V passage during the V valid period, the mode status is set to "2". Further, if the jackpot game is related to the 15R first jackpot and there is a V pass during the V valid period, the mode status is set to "3". If it is a hit game (big hit game) related to the 2R third big hit or small hit, the mode status is set to "4" or "5". The initial value of the mode status is "1".

Due to such a change (setting) of the mode status, the effect mode in the effect symbol game effect executed along with the variable display of the special symbol after the end of the special game (big hit game, hit game) is changed (after setting). It is said to be a production mode corresponding to the mode status of. That is, in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct, if the 15R first big hit and there is a V passage during the V valid period of the special game, the first (first) special symbol change after the end of the special game. Along with the display, the effect mode C is executed. As a result, the player is notified that the current gaming state is a high probability state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a 2R third big hit or a small hit, the effect mode D or E is accompanied by the variation display of the first (first) special symbol after the end of the special game. Will be executed. As a result, the player is notified that the current gaming state may be a high-probability state or a low-probability state, that is, a high-probability state may be possible. Further, this effect mode D or E is in a high probability state after the special game related to the 2R third big hit, but may be in a low probability state after the special game related to the small hit. A person cannot be definitively determined to be in a high probability state. Therefore, this effect mode can also be referred to as a probability non-notification mode.

Furthermore, in the mode status change process (S4802), since an upper limit is set for the number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the changed effect mode, the upper limit number of times is set to the value "M" of the effect mode counter corresponding to the changed effect mode. To set. Specifically, when setting the effect mode B, the value "Mb" of the effect mode counter is set to 100 (when V is not passed during the 15R second jackpot and V valid period) or 140 (15R first jackpot and V is valid). When there is no V passage during the period) is set. When setting the effect mode C, 140 is set in the value "Mc" of the effect mode counter. Further, when setting the effect mode D or E, 30 is set in the value "Md" or "Me" of the effect mode counter.

Next, in S4803, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status (S4803), and then in S4804, the effect pattern (effect mode) of the ending effect is selected based on the analyzed ending command and the referenced mode status. Performs the ending effect pattern selection process (S4804). The ending effect is an effect to be executed during the ending period after all the large winning opening opening processes in the special game are completed. Then, in S4805, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect based on the selected ending effect pattern (S4805), and ends the process.

Further, when the ending effect start command set in S4805 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined ending effect image to the ROM of the image control board 100. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, in this embodiment, when the special game related to the 15R first jackpot is executed and V is passed during the V valid period, the characters "effect mode C rush" are displayed on the display screen 7a as the ending effect. Is selected. Further, as the ending effect for the special game related to the 2R third big hit or small hit, one that displays the characters "effect mode D rush" or "effect mode E rush" on the display screen 7a is selected.

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with a specific flag for determining whether or not the amount of control processing related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process of the sub control unit is large, and is related to the game effect. When the control processing amount is determined to be larger than the predetermined amount (during the execution of the effect start processing at the time of entering the ball), the specific flag is turned ON, and when the specific flag is ON, the game effect is determined. It is possible to prevent the load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive by performing control processing with a small amount of processing (low control load) as processing. In addition, when the specific flag is OFF, as a game effect determination process, a control process with a larger amount of processing (higher control load) than when the specific flag is ON is performed to execute various game effects with high taste. Is possible.

As a result, the control load (control state) of the sub-control unit balances the control load between the processing amount of the game effect determination process and the control processing amount related to the game effect excluding it, and the game effect control unit is excessive. It is possible to execute various game effects without imposing a heavy load. also,
It is possible to control the optimum game production. In addition, by providing a characteristic configuration that is not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to achieve unique effects that conventional pachinko gaming machines do not have, or significant effects compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines. Become.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, in which the notice effect setting process of the first embodiment and the notice determination table for the high load state (specific flag is ON state) are different, will be described. In the second embodiment, when the load is low (the specific flag is OFF), the notice effect to be executed is determined based on the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52, which is the same as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the high load state (specific flag is ON state), unlike the first embodiment, the notice effect to be executed is determined based on the notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 56, the advance notice determination table for the high load state of the second embodiment is limited to the cut-in advance notice determination table, and the (executable) advance notice effect type to be determined is only the cut-in advance notice. Will be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52, the notice decision table for the low load state is a conversation notice decision table, a step-up notice decision table, a cut-in notice decision table, and a movable part notice decision table, which are subject to decision. There are four types of (executable) notice effects: conversation notice, step-up notice, cut-in notice, and moving part notice. That is, in the high load state in the second embodiment, the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the sub control unit (notice effect determination unit) is smaller than that in the low load state (4 types → 1 type). Further, in a high load state, it can be said that the feasible advance notice effect type is fixed to one type. As a result, it is possible to significantly reduce the amount of processing in the advance notice effect determination process, and it is possible to prevent the control load from becoming excessive when the control load of the sub control unit is high.

Further, in the high load state in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the notice effect is to be executed, the number of the notice effect types that can be executed is reduced as compared with the low load state, and a specific notice effect type (cut-in notice effect) is used. ) Is executed, but the number of (executable) game effects included in the specific advance notice effect type remains three, which is the same as the advance notice decision table for the low load state, so that the game effects are diverse. It also has a certain effect in terms of conversion, and it is possible to secure a game interest.

Next, the advance notice effect setting process (S4506) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. First, in S4951, it is determined whether or not the specific flag is ON (S4951), and when it is determined that the specific flag is ON, that is, it is in a high load state (YES in S4951), the conversation notice determination and step-up are performed. The advance notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 56 is set (S4974), and the process proceeds to S4967, without executing the advance notice determination, the movable part advance notice determination, or the like. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the specific flag is ON, no matter what kind of information the fluctuation pattern information is (even the information related to the big hit), the conversation notice effect, the step-up notice effect, and the movable None of the club notice productions will be performed. Further, when the specific flag is ON, the process shifts to the S4967 process without performing the processes of S4952 to S4965, so that the processing amount of the advance notice effect setting process (game effect determination process) can be significantly reduced. It is possible to prevent the control load of the sub control unit from becoming excessive.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4951 that the specific flag is not ON (NO in S4951), the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52 is set (S4973). Next, the process related to the conversation notice determination for determining whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect is executed (S4952 to S4956). Similar to the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, this process determines whether or not to execute the conversation notice effect based on the notice determination table or the like shown in FIG. 52, and if so, which case. It determines whether to execute the advance notice effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, in S4957, the process related to the step-up notice determination for determining whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect is executed (S4957 to S4961). Since this process is also the same control process as the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Next, in S4962, the process related to the movable portion advance notice determination for determining whether or not to execute the movable portion advance notice effect is executed (S4962 to 4966). Since this process is also the same control process as the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the low load state (specification) is obtained for three types of advance notice effect types (conversation advance notice effect type, step-up advance notice effect type, and moving part advance notice effect type) out of the four types of advance notice effect types. Only when the flag is OFF state), it is subject to determination (of the advance notice effect determination unit) in the advance notice effect setting process. A plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, including these four types of advance notice effect types, are stored in the advance notice effect storage unit (sub-control unit). As a result, it is possible to diversify the variation of the game effect in the low load state, and to execute the game effect with high taste without increasing the control load on the sub control unit.

Next, in S4967, the cut-in notice determination is executed. When the specific flag is ON, whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice determination table for the high load state shown in FIG. 56 set in S4974, and which cut-in notice effect is executed. Is determined (S4967). When the specific flag is OFF, whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the cut-in notice determination table shown in FIG. 52 (C) set in S4973, and which cut-in notice effect is executed. Is determined (S4967). Next, in S4968, it is determined whether or not to execute the cut-in notice (S4968), and if it is determined to execute the cut-in notice (YES in S4968), a cut-in notice flag indicating that the cut-in notice is executed is set. Turn it on (S4969), set the decided cut-in notice effect (S4970), and shift to the processing of S4972. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cut-in notice effect is not executed (NO in S4968), the cut-in notice flag is turned OFF (if it is already OFF, it remains OFF) (S4971), and the process proceeds to S4972. Since S4972 is the same control process as the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the sub-control unit considers that the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the advance notice effect determination process is larger than the predetermined amount, that is, when the specific flag is ON, The number of advance notice effect types that can be determined in the advance notice determination table for the high load state is reduced and fixed to a specific advance notice effect type (cut-in advance notice effect in Example 2). As a result, it is possible to remarkably reduce the amount of processing related to the advance notice effect determination process and prevent the control load of the sub control unit from becoming excessive.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 3 will be described. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment when it is considered that the control related to the game effect of the sub control unit is more than the predetermined amount, that is, when the specific flag is turned on. In the first embodiment, the specific flag is turned ON while the execution of the ball entry start processing (S4402) performed when the sub control unit receives the start ball entry command from the main control unit is set as a high load state. In the third embodiment, the low load state is set during the execution of the special game (big hit game), and the high load state is set when the special game is not executed. It should be noted that even when the special game is not being executed, the effect symbol (special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner, and the control process related to the effect symbol (special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (such a period is referred to as "variable display". (Also referred to as "in processing") may be in a high load state.

During the execution of the big hit game, the production for the big hit game such as the round effect is executed, but since the effect symbol (special symbol) is not displayed in a variable manner, the control load such as the variable effect start process and the variable effect end process is high. The predetermined control process is not performed. Therefore, in the third embodiment, it can be said that the load of the control processing of the sub control unit is lower during the big hit game than during the “variation display processing”. Therefore, during the fluctuation display processing, the specific flag is turned on to indicate that the load is high, and during the execution of the jackpot game, the specific flag is turned off to indicate that the load is low. Then, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect to be executed based on different notice determination tables depending on whether the specific flag is in the ON state or the specific flag is in the OFF state. This point is the same as in Example 1 and Example 2.

In the third embodiment, when a predetermined timing during the special game, for example, when a start ball entry command is received, when a predetermined round (for example, 5R, 10R, etc.) is started, or when a predetermined round is finished. , It is assumed that the advance notice effect determination process (game effect determination process) is performed. It is also possible to execute the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination process during the special game during the special game or during the variable display of the effect symbol. Here, it is assumed that the advance notice production includes the above-mentioned advance production. Then, for example, when the advance notice effect is determined during the special game, the advance notice effect to be executed is determined using the advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 52, and when the advance notice effect is determined during the variable display process, FIG. 53 The advance notice effect to be executed may be determined using the advance notice determination table shown in.

Further, in the third embodiment, since the advance notice effect is determined using a notice determination table different from that during the variable display process during the big hit game, it is possible to execute a rehearsal effect that is not a determination target during the variable display process. Therefore, since it has a dedicated advance notice effect that can be executed only during the big hit game, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the game effect during the big hit game and enhance the game interest.

Next, a process of turning the specific flag ON or OFF in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. In the third embodiment, the specific flag is turned on by the process when the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on, the state is determined to be a high load state. Then, in the special game effect selection process (S4410) executed with the start of the big hit game shown in FIG. 57, a process of turning off the specific flag is performed. As a result, it becomes a state determined to be a low load state.

[Special game production selection process]
As shown in FIG. 57, in the special game effect selection process (S4410), first, the opening command is analyzed (S4701), then the special game effect pattern selection process is performed (S4702), and then the opening command effect start command set process is performed. (S4703) and move to the processing of S4704. Since the processes of S4701 to S4703 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, in S4704, the specific flag is turned off (S4704), and the process is completed. By the process of turning off this specific flag, it is determined that the execution of the special game is in the low load state (first control state). Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the special game, it becomes possible to determine the advance notice effect that is not executed during the variable display process as the advance notice effect (game effect). In addition, the advance notice effect determined during this special game may be executed during the special game. That is, if the control process can determine the high-load game effect in the low-load state, it is desirable to execute the high-load game effect during the low-load state. This makes it possible to execute control related to the optimum game effect.

[Ending effect selection process]
Next, a process of turning on the specific flag with the end of the special game will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the ending effect selection process (S4412), first, the specific flag is turned ON (S4806), and the process proceeds to the process of S4801. By the process of turning on this specific flag, it is determined that the high load state (second control state) is after the end of the special game. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed after the end of this special game, the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice determination table for the high load state as the advance notice effect (game effect). Further, the advance notice effect determined when the special game is not executed (high load state in which the specific flag is ON) may be executed during the state (state in which the specific flag is ON). When the advance notice effect determined in the high load state is executed in the low load state (during the special game), various advance notice effects (dedicated advance notice effects) can be determined (executable) for a limited period of the low load state. It cannot be used effectively. Therefore, it is preferable to execute the advance notice effect determined in the high load state during the high load state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the execution of the special game is set as the low load state, and the special advance notice effect that is not the decision target during the variable display of the identification information is set as the decision target. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. As another aspect of the setting control of the specific flag, a state in which the specific flag is ON is determined as a low load state, and a state in which the specific flag is OFF is determined as a high load state. The mode may be such that the flag is turned ON.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine includes a advance notice effect determination unit that determines the game effect to be executed and a advance notice effect execution unit that executes the game effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit, and is in a low load state ( As a game effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state), a game effect not to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the high load state (second control state) may be provided. ..

Further, the game effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the low load state may be different from the game effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the high load state. Further, the advance notice effect execution unit may execute the game effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the low load state in the low load state. Further, the advance notice effect execution unit may execute the game effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the high load state in the high load state. Further, the low load state (first control state) is a predetermined time when the special game is being executed, and the high load state (second control state) is a predetermined time when the special game is not being executed. May be good.

In addition, it is equipped with a start port through which the game ball can enter, and as a control related to the game effect (effect control process), it has a control related to the game effect at the time of entering the ball, which is executed based on the ball entering the start port, and is in a low load state. Is a predetermined time when the control related to the game effect at the time of ball entry (the effect control process at the time of ball entry, the notice effect control process at the time of ball entry) is being executed, and the high load state controls the game effect at the time of ball entry. It may be a predetermined time when it is not executed. Further, as the control related to the game effect, it has the control related to the game effect at the start of the change (the effect control process at the start of the change, the notice effect control process at the start of the change) that is executed based on the start of the variation display of the identification information, and is in a low load state. Is a predetermined time when the control related to the game effect at the start of fluctuation is being executed, and the high load state may be a predetermined time when the control related to the game effect at the start of fluctuation is not being executed.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 4 will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when it is considered that the control related to the game effect of the sub control unit is more than the predetermined amount, that is, when the specific flag is turned on, the control is different from the first and third embodiments. In the fourth embodiment, the high load state is set during the execution of the variation effect start process, and the low load state is set at other times. The variation effect start process is a process executed when the sub control unit receives a variation start command from the main control unit, and among them, a random number acquisition process for determining the effect, a variation effect pattern selection process, a setting process such as a notice effect, etc. , It is necessary to perform a lot of processing, and it is a control processing with a relatively large amount of processing.

In the fourth embodiment, the specific flag is turned ON during the execution of the variation effect start process having a large amount of processing, and the specific flag is turned OFF when the variation effect start process is not executed. Further, since the advance notice effect determination process is performed along with the change effect start process, the advance notice effect determination process executed during the change effect start process uses the advance notice determination table for the high load state (for the second control state). The advance notice effect is determined by using the advance notice effect determination process, which is executed when the variable effect start process is not in progress (for example, during a big hit game), using the advance notice determination table for the low load state (for the first control state). It is possible to determine the advance notice production. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive, and to perform various game effects by controlling the optimum game effects.

[Variation production start processing]
Next, a process of turning the specific flag ON or OFF in accordance with the variation effect start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the variation effect start processing (S4402), first, the specific flag is turned ON (S4508), and the process shifts to the processing of S4501. By the process of turning on this specific flag, it is determined that the high load state (second control state) is being executed during the execution of the variation effect start process. Then, in the fourth embodiment, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the variable effect start process, the advance notice effect determined by using the advance notice determination table for the high load state is executed as the advance notice effect (game effect). Will be done.

Next, processing is performed in order from S4501 to S4507. Since these processes are the same as the variable effect start process of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, following S4507, in S4509, the specific flag is turned off (S4509), and the process is completed. By the process of turning off this specific flag, it is determined that the load state is low (first control state) after the variation effect start process is completed (when the variation effect start process is not performed). Then, in the fourth embodiment, if the advance notice effect determination process is performed when the change effect start process is not executed, the advance notice determined by using the advance notice determination table for the low load state as the advance notice effect (game effect). The production will be executed.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the high load state is set during the execution of the variable effect start process, the low load state is set when the variable effect start process is not executed, and the execution is performed using different notice determination tables. The notice production is decided. In addition, in the low load state, a special advance notice effect that is not a decision target in the high load state is set as the decision target. This prevents the processing load of the sub-control unit from becoming excessive, and by executing the control related to the optimum game effect, it is possible to execute various game effects.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 5 will be described. In the fifth embodiment, an aura notice effect (first aura notice 203, second aura notice 204, aura color advance notice 205) different from the notice effect (conversation notice, step-up notice, etc.) described in the first embodiment will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the aura notice effect can be a notice effect of the determination target (executable) in both the low load state and the high load state. As a result, it is possible to reduce only the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type while maintaining the number and types of the advance notice effect species as much as possible (without reducing as much as possible).

Next, the aura advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect of the fifth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG. 62A shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of "○") are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. ing. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e in the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may show the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 62 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (a). At the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, an aura notice (first aura notice 203, notice effect) in which the character A201 or the like appears is executed. FIG. 62B shows a scene in which the character A201 is executing the first aura notice 203 (possibility suggestion image) in which the character A201 tries to release the aura from the body. As for the aura notice, depending on the color of the aura emitted from the character image such as the character A201, the effect pending pattern, and the variable pattern, the result of the variable display being executed or the result of the pending variable display executed later is a big hit. It is a game production that shows the possibility of becoming. Further, with the start of the aura notice, the three effect symbols 8 are slightly moved to the end (upper part) of the display screen 7a to improve the visibility of the notice effect.

FIG. 62 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (b). At the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, the first aura notice 203 is executed, and the character A201 emits the green first aura 203a (possibility suggestion image). As the color of the first aura 203a emitted by the character A201, four kinds of colors of green, yellow, red, and gold are prepared. Then, a predetermined color is selected according to the jackpot reliability of the variable display (variable pattern) being executed, and the color of the first aura 203a of the first aura notice 203 is executed with the selected (determined) color. NS. In the first aura notice 203, when the color of the emitted aura changes in the order of green → yellow → red → gold while the character A201 is straddling, the character A201 becomes the selected color. The posture is changed, and the color of the first aura 203a of the first aura notice 203 is determined by the color at that time. The green first aura color indicates that the jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot) is 5%, and the yellow first aura color indicates that the jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot) is 10%. The red first aura color indicates that the jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot) is 33%, and the golden first aura color indicates that the jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot) is 100%. Indicates that. That is, when the first aura is displayed in gold, the big hit is confirmed.

A means for setting a predetermined aura color from these plurality of aura colors in correspondence with the jackpot reliability (special game execution feasibility) is also referred to as a "possibility suggestion image color setting unit". In addition, the means for suggesting (notifying) the jackpot reliability (special game feasibility) is also referred to as a "possibility suggestion notification unit". Further, the means for displaying the aura color (possibility suggestion image) with the color set by the possibility suggestion image color setting unit is also referred to as the "possibility suggestion image display unit" (for example, the display screen 7a or the display screen 7a). 1st aura display unit and 2nd aura display unit). Further, the aura colors such as green, yellow, red, and gold may be referred to as a first color, a second color, a third color, a fourth color, and the like.

FIG. 62 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (c). FIG. 62 (d) shows a scene in which the first aura notice 203 shown in FIG. 62 (c) is continuously executed and the color of the first aura 203a changes from green to yellow. By changing the color of the first aura 203a from green to yellow, which indicates that the jackpot reliability is higher than that of the green, the player raises the expectation for the jackpot and enhances the game interest. Further, FIG. 62 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (d). FIG. 62 (e) shows a scene in which the first aura notice 203 shown in FIG. 62 (d) is continuously executed and the color of the first aura 203a changes from yellow to red. By changing the color of the first aura 203a from yellow to red, which indicates that the jackpot reliability is higher than that of yellow, the player raises the expectation for the jackpot and enhances the game interest. Further, as the color of the first aura 203a changes to red (displayed in red), the character A201 that emits the first aura extends its posture and changes its posture to the color of the first aura 203a. Indicates that it was determined in red.

FIG. 62 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (e). In FIG. 62 (f), the first aura notice 203 shown in FIG. 62 (e) is continuously executed, and the first aura 203a is continuously released in the red color confirmed in FIG. 62 (e). .. Further, after the first aura 203a of the first aura notice 203 is displayed in red, the scene where the second aura notice 204 occurs in the variable pattern display area 9e at the lower part of the display screen 7a is shown. The second aura notice 204 is a notice effect executed following the first aura notice 203, and generates a second aura 204a around a variable pattern 9f or a predetermined reserved pattern 9a (an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image). By doing so, a notice effect indicating that the result of the variable display related to the variable pattern 9f or the reserved pattern 9a that generated the second aura 204a (the result of the specific variable display) is relatively likely to be a big hit. Is. As a result, the player raises the expectation for the big hit and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the second aura 204a of the second aura notice 204 (second notice effect) generated after the first aura 203a of the first aura notice 203 (first notice effect) is generated is the display color of the first aura 203a. Displayed in the corresponding color. In FIG. 62 (f), since the first aura 203a is determined and displayed in red, the second aura 204a is displayed in red corresponding to the color indicated by the first aura 203a. The occurrence of the second aura 204a indicates that the result of the variable display during execution is likely to be a big hit. Specifically, it is informed that the result of the variable display currently being executed (the result of a specific variable display) has a 50% chance of becoming a big hit. That is, the reliability of the jackpot shown to the player by the advance notice effect is improved. This enhances the interest of the game. Further, the first aura notice 203 executed first is executed with a display size larger than that of the second aura notice executed later. As a result, the first aura notice 203 (possibility suggestion image) that triggers the execution (color change) of the second aura notice (directed image) is made to stand out, and the first aura notice and the second aura notice (directed pending pattern 9a) are highlighted. , 9b, and the variable pattern 9f), it is possible to pay attention to the change in the display mode.

FIG. 63 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (e). In FIG. 63 (g), the first aura notice 203 shown in FIG. 62 (e) is continuously executed, and the release of the first aura 203a is continued in the red color confirmed in FIG. 62 (e). .. Further, after the first aura 203a of the first aura notice 203 is displayed in red, the scene where the second aura notice 204 occurs in the first effect hold display area 9c at the lower part of the display screen 7a is shown. The second aura notice 204 shown in FIG. 63 (g) is a notice effect executed following the first aura notice 203, and is around the hold pattern 9a (the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image) corresponding to the hold 2. By generating the second aura 204a, it is a notice effect indicating that the result of the variation display related to the hold 2 (the result of the specific variation display) is relatively likely to be a big hit. Specifically, it is notified that the result of the variable display related to Hold 2 (the result of the specific variable display) has a 50% chance of becoming a big hit. As a result, the player raises the expectation for the big hit and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, when the second aura 204a occurs for the effect hold displayed in the effect hold display areas 9c and 9d, the variable display currently being executed, which has executed the first aura notice 203, may be definitely removed. .. Further, in addition to the variation display currently being executed, the variation display corresponding to the effect hold before the effect hold that generated the second aura 204a (the variation corresponding to hold 1 in FIG. 63 (g)). If there is a display), the fluctuation display may also be definite. As a result, the player can be directed without inserting a big hit game or the like between the variable display during execution when the first aura notice 203 is executed and the variable display related to the effect hold when the second aura notice 204 is executed. Since it can be shown, it becomes easy for the player to recognize the continuity (relevance) of the production between the first aura notice 203 and the second aura notice 204. Further, this makes it easy for the player to recognize that the fluctuation display according to the second aura notice 204 has a high jackpot reliability.

Further, also in this execution mode, the second aura 204a of the second aura notice 204 (second notice effect) generated after the first aura 203a of the first aura notice 203 (first notice effect) is generated is the first. It is displayed in a color corresponding to the display color of the aura 203a. In FIG. 63 (g), since the first aura 203a is determined and displayed in red, the second aura 204a is displayed in red corresponding to the color indicated by the first aura 203a.

Further, as shown in the execution mode shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to 62 (f) and the execution mode shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to 63 (g), following the first aura notice 203, the second In some cases, the aura notice 204 is executed, and in some cases, although not shown, the first aura notice 203 is executed and the second aura notice 204 is not executed. In this case, it is more likely that the player will be in the case where the second aura notice 204 is executed following the first aura notice 203 than in the case where the first aura notice 203 is executed and the second aura notice 204 is not executed. The indicated jackpot reliability is considered to be high.

Further, the display color of the second aura 204a also has four kinds of colors of green, yellow, red, and gold, similarly to the first aura 203a. When the second aura notice 204 is executed, the jackpot reliability is assumed to be improved by about 10%. That is, when the second aura notice is executed following the first aura notice 203, when the green second aura is displayed following the green first aura, it relates to the pattern in which the second aura is displayed. It shows that the jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot) of the variable display is 15%, and when the yellow second aura is displayed after the yellow first aura, the pattern displaying the second aura is displayed. It shows that the jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot) of the variable display is 20%, and when the red first aura is displayed followed by the red second aura, the pattern in which the second aura is displayed is displayed. It shows that the jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot) of the fluctuation display related to is 50%, and when the golden second aura is displayed after the golden first aura, the second aura is displayed. It shows that the jackpot reliability (possibility of becoming a jackpot) of the variable display related to the pattern is 100%.

Further, FIG. 63 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 62 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 62 (b). In the execution mode of the first aura notice 203 described above, by proceeding from FIG. 62 (b) to the scene of FIG. 62 (c), the character A201 emits the first aura 203a in a predetermined color and has a predetermined jackpot reliability. It was an indication of the degree. The execution mode of the first aura notice 203 shown in FIG. 63 (h) shows a scene in which the character A201 fails to release the first aura 203a, and ends the first aura notice 203 without releasing the first aura 203a. It is a thing. In addition, the player is notified by displaying the characters "scene ..." that the release of the first aura has failed. Further, in this execution mode, the second aura notice 204 is not executed after the first aura notice 203.

Next, another execution mode of the aura notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 (i) to 64 (l). FIG. 63 (i) shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state, similarly to FIG. 62 (a) described above. FIG. 63 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 63 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 63 (i). Character B202 appears on the left side of the display screen 7a of FIG. 63 (j), and the characters "A red aura is generated !!" are displayed. In this game production (notice production), the aura notice (first aura notice and / and the second aura notice) will be executed from now on, and the aura notice will start with the color of the aura generated in the aura notice. It is "Aura color advance notice 205" to be announced in advance.

Further, in the aura color advance notice 205, the characters themselves emitted from the character B202 can be displayed in a color corresponding to the aura color to be announced. In FIG. 63 (j), since the occurrence of the red aura is announced (notified), a part or all of the characters "A red aura will occur !!" is displayed in red. In addition, it is also possible to increase the player's expectation when the color of the character is displayed in a color corresponding to the aura color foretold, such as by displaying in white characters. In addition, there are cases where the characters of the aura color advance notice 205 are displayed in white characters and cases where the characters of the color corresponding to the aura color of the notice are displayed, and the characters of the color corresponding to the aura color of the notice are displayed. In the case, the jackpot reliability of notifying the player may be higher than in the case of displaying in white characters. Further, the character color of the aura color advance notice 205 has a plurality of colors (white, green, yellow, red, gold) corresponding to the normal color and the aura color to be announced.

FIG. 63 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 63 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 63 (j). In FIG. 63 (k), following (after) the execution of the aura color advance notice 205, the character A201 is displayed and the first aura notice 203 is executed in response to the advance notice in the aura color advance notice. .. It shows a scene in which the first aura notice 203 (possibility suggestion image) in which the character A201 tries to release the aura from the body is being executed by stepping on it. FIG. 64 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 63 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 63 (k). In FIG. 64 (l), the first aura notice 203 shown in FIG. 63 (k) is continuously executed, the color of the first aura 203a changes from green to yellow to red, and the aura color is red. After confirmation, the second aura notice 204 is executed, and the notice color of the aura color advance notice 205 is executed around the variable pattern 9f (directed image different from the possibility suggestion image) corresponding to the currently executing variable display. And the scene where the red second aura 204a corresponding to the color of the first aura 203a is generated is shown. This indicates that the result of the variation display (variation display currently being executed) related to the variation pattern 9f (the result of the specific variation display) is relatively likely to be a big hit. As a result, the player raises the expectation for the big hit and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, in the above-described execution mode, the second aura notice 204 is selected from the variable pattern 9f corresponding to the currently executing variable display or the effect pending 9a and 9b corresponding to the pending (undigested) variable display. A mode in which the second aura 204a is generated in any one of the above has been described. Not limited to such an embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64 (m), the second aura notice 204 is a variable pattern 9f corresponding to the currently executing variable display, or a pending (undigested) variable display. It may have an aspect of generating a second aura 204a for a plurality of variable patterns 9f and / or effect hold 9a, 9b selected from the corresponding effect hold 9a, 9b. Further, these may all occur in the same aura color, or at least a part of the aura colors may be different.

Further, in the above-described execution mode, the mode in which the first aura notice 203 is executed first, and then the second aura notice 204 is executed with the color corresponding to the color of the first aura 203a of the first aura notice will be described. did. Not limited to such an embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 (n) to 64 (p), the second aura notice 204 is executed first, and then the color of the second aura 204a according to the second aura notice is executed. The color corresponding to the above may have an aspect in which the first aura notice 203 is executed.

Specifically, FIG. 64 (n) shows a scene in which the second aura notice 204 that generates the second aura 204 is executed for the variable pattern 9f corresponding to the currently executing variable display in the predetermined variable display. Is shown. Further, in FIG. 64 (n), the second aura 204 is displayed in red, which indicates that the jackpot reliability is relatively high. FIG. 64 (o) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 64 (n) in the same variation display as in FIG. 64 (n). FIG. 64 (n) shows a scene in which the second aura notice 204 is continuously executed, and the first aura notice 203 is executed following the second aura notice 204. In the first aura notice 203, a scene is shown in which the character A201 appears, emits the first aura 203a to the surroundings, and the first aura 203a is displayed changing from green to yellow.

FIG. 64 (p) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 64 (o) in the same variation display as in FIG. 64 (o). In FIG. 64 (p), the second aura notice 204 and the first aura notice 203 are continuously executed, and the first aura 203a of the first aura notice 203 is the second aura notice 204 shown in advance. The scene confirmed in the same color (red) as the second aura 204a is shown. Similar to the above-described execution mode, the display color of the first aura notice to be executed later is announced by the display color of the second aura notice to be executed first, so that the display color of the aura notice to be executed first is high. When the color indicates the degree, the player can raise the expectation for the big hit and see the subsequent game production (aura notice that can be executed after that).

Further, the second aura notice 204 executed first is executed with a display size smaller than that of the first aura notice 203 executed later. That is, the first aura notice 203 (first aura) to be executed later is displayed in a size larger than the second aura notice 204 (second aura) in which the color is notified in advance. As a result, the first aura notice (directed image) whose color changes according to the color of the second aura notice (possibility suggestion image) displayed earlier is made conspicuous, and the first aura notice and the second aura notice (the second aura notice) It is possible to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the production pending patterns 9a and 9b and the variable pattern 9f).

Further, in the above-described execution mode, when the first aura notice is executed first and then the second aura notice is executed, the second aura color of the second aura notice is displayed first, and the first aura notice is displayed first. A mode of displaying in a color corresponding to the first aura color of the above has been described. Not limited to such an embodiment, when the first aura notice is executed first and then the second aura notice is executed, the second aura color of the second aura notice is displayed first, and the first aura notice is displayed first. It may have an aspect of displaying in a color different from the first aura color (red with high reliability) (for example, white of a normal color). In this case, the mode in which the second aura color of the second aura notice is displayed in the color corresponding to the first aura color corresponds to the second aura color of the second aura notice corresponding to the first aura color. The jackpot reliability suggested to the player may be higher than the mode of displaying in a color that does not allow the player to do so.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the number and types of the advance notice effect species to be determined are maintained. , Only the number of notice effects belonging to the notice effect type is reduced. Therefore, the above-mentioned aura notice can be executed in any of the low load state and the high load state, but the number of execution modes differs depending on the state. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced.

Specifically, in the low load state, all the patterns of the above-mentioned aura notice may be executed, and in the high load state, some patterns of the above-mentioned aura notice may be executed. For example, in a low load state, all the display modes of green, yellow, red, and gold can be executed as the aura color, and the mode of displaying the aura color advance notice can also be executed. On the other hand, in a high load state, only the red and gold display modes can be executed, and the aura color advance notice cannot be executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the aura notice and display a highly reliable aura notice, reduce the control load in a high load state, and prevent the deterioration of the game interest as much as possible. Become. Further, in the above-described execution mode, more execution modes may be executed in the low load state than in the high load state.

Further, instead of such an aspect, this aura notice is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the low load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the low load state, and a notice effect that cannot be executed in the high load state. As a notice effect that cannot be decided in the notice decision table for a high load state. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, diversify the execution mode of the advance notice effect, and optimize the control process applied to the game effect control unit. Become.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the aura notice is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the high load state, and as a notice effect that cannot be executed in the low load state. It may be a notice effect that cannot be decided by the notice decision table for the low load state. Even in such an aspect, the advance notice effect to be determined is changed according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, the execution mode of the advance notice effect is diversified, and the control process applied to the game effect control unit is optimized. It becomes possible.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 6 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the step-up notice effect 211 (progress effect, step-up notice) in which the advance notice effect (conversation notice, step-up notice, etc.) and the execution mode (effect mode, display mode) described in the first embodiment are different will be described. .. Similar to the first embodiment, the step-up notice effect can be a decision target (executable) notice effect in both the low load state and the high load state. As a result, it is possible to reduce only the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type while maintaining the number and types of the advance notice effect species as much as possible (without reducing as much as possible).

Next, the step-up notice effect, which is the advance notice effect of the sixth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 70. FIG. 65A shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of "○") are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. ing. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e in the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may show the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 65 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (a). At the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, a step-up notice effect 211 (progress effect), which will be described later, is executed. The step-up notice effect 211 indicates the execution of a predetermined game effect (character effect, reach effect) by gradually switching and displaying a predetermined effect image, and the step-up notice effect being executed is next. It is a notice production that indicates that the stage is transitioning (progressing). Further, the step-up notice effect 211 is a notice effect indicating the feasibility of the jackpot game, and indicates the feasibility of a different jackpot game depending on which game effect is suggested to be executed in the step-up notice effect. ..

Further, the step-up notice effect 211 is a notice effect in which the effect image can be switched and displayed step by step, but an execution mode ending with a one-stage effect image and an execution ending with displaying a two-stage effect image. It has an execution mode that ends by displaying a three-stage effect image, and an execution mode that ends by displaying a four-stage effect image, and has a jackpot reliability (selected variation pattern) and an acquired step-up notice effect. One of the execution modes is determined by the step-up notice effect determination based on the random number value or the like.

The step-up notice effect 211 shown in FIG. 65 (b) is a scene in which the effect image of the first stage is displayed. As the first-stage effect image, a specific effect suggestion image 212 (specific effect execution image, effect image) and a next step transition suggestion image 213 (progress image, effect image) are displayed. Further, the first-stage effect images in the step-up notice effect 211 shown in FIG. 65 (b) are three (three types) specific effect suggestion images 212 and one (one type) next step transition suggestion image 213. Is displayed. Further, as three (three types) specific effect suggestion images 212, a shoot effect suggestion image 212c (reach effect suggestion image, a specific effect execution image, an effect image), a fishing effect suggestion image 212a, and a batting effect suggestion image 212b , Is displayed. Further, as the next step transition suggestion image 213, an effect image in which the characters "NEXT" are displayed is displayed.

Here, in this embodiment, as the specific effect suggestion image 212, there are a fishing effect suggestion image 212a, a batting effect suggestion image 212b, a shoot effect suggestion image 212c, and a battle effect suggestion image 213d. Then, in the step-up notice effect 211, when the fishing effect suggestion image 212a is selected (determined) and the fishing effect suggestion image 212a is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the fishing effect suggestion is followed by the step-up notice effect 211. A fishing effect (fishing reach) (shown by) corresponding to image 212a (shown by) is executed. In a fishing effect (not shown), if a specific character catches a fish, it becomes a big hit (a big hit game is executed), and if the fish cannot be caught, it becomes a big hit.

Further, when the batting effect suggestion image 212b is selected (determined) in the step-up notice effect 211 and the batting effect suggestion image 212b is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the batting effect suggestion suggestion follows the step-up notice effect 211. A batting effect (batting reach) (shown by) corresponding to image 212b (not shown) is executed. In the batting effect (not shown), if a specific character batting and hits a home run, a big hit is obtained (a big hit game is executed), and if the home run cannot be hit, the hit is lost. Further, in the step-up notice effect 211, when the shoot effect suggestion image 212c is selected (determined) and the shoot effect suggestion image 212c is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the shoot effect suggestion is followed by the step-up notice effect 211. A shoot effect (shoot reach) (shown by) corresponding to image 212c is executed. In the shooting effect (not shown), if a specific character shoots toward a soccer goal and the ball can be put into the goal, it becomes a big hit (a big hit game is executed), and if it cannot be put into the goal, it is missed. It becomes.

Further, in the step-up notice effect 211, when the battle effect suggestion image 213d is selected (determined) and the battle effect suggestion image 213d is displayed in a predetermined display mode (display mode of FIG. 68 (j)), the step-up is performed. Following the advance notice effect 211, a battle effect (battle reach) (shown by) corresponding to the battle effect suggestion image 213d is executed. In the battle effect (battle reach) shown in FIG. 68 (k), a ally character 218 and an enemy character 219 battle, and when the ally character 218 wins, a big hit is made (a big hit game is executed), and the enemy character 219 wins. If you do (if your ally character 218 cannot win), you will be out. These specific effect suggestion images 212 display a predetermined character, and if the character achieves a predetermined predetermined purpose, it becomes a big hit (the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific result), and is predetermined. If the predetermined purpose is not achieved, the game is out of order, and such a game effect is also referred to as a "character effect".

In addition, the fishing effect (fishing reach), the batting effect (batting reach), the shoot effect (shoot reach), and the battle effect (battle reach) have the possibility of becoming a big hit shown to the player (the feasibility of the big hit game). It is a game production that shows different possibilities. The possibility of becoming a big hit is also referred to as "big hit reliability". As shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 66 (e), each specific effect suggestion image 212 is provided with a jackpot reliability suggestion image display unit, and is displayed on the jackpot reliability suggestion image display unit. The jackpot reliability suggestion image 215 shows the jackpot reliability of the corresponding game effect.

Specifically, the fishing effect (fishing reach) is defined as the reliability of a single "☆" jackpot, and the probability of a jackpot is about 5%. In addition, the batting effect (batting reach) is the reliability of two "☆" jackpots, and the probability of a jackpot is about 10%. In addition, the shoot production (shoot reach) is based on the reliability of three "☆" jackpots, and the probability of a jackpot is 20%. In addition, the battle effect (battle reach) has the highest reliability of 5 "☆" jackpots in the specific effect suggestion image, and the probability of a jackpot is 50%. As a result, when the step-up notice effect 211 is executed, the player plays the game with the expectation that the specific effect suggestion image 212 having the highest reliability of the jackpot will be displayed. Further, in the step-up notice effect 211, the game is performed with the expectation that the specific effect suggestion image 212 having the highest reliability of the jackpot will be selected and the display mode will be determined. When the specific effect suggestion image 212 with high jackpot reliability is displayed or the display mode is set, the player can remarkably enhance the game interest.

The selection cursor 214 shown as a square with a broken line inside the batting effect suggestion image 212b of FIG. 65B shows a specific effect suggestion image that may be selected. Further, in the step-up notice effect 211, when the next step transition suggestion image 213 (progress image, effect image) is selected and the display mode is set (FIG. 66 (d)), the step-up notice effect is next. Proceed to the step of. When the specific effect suggestion image is selected and the display mode is set, the step-up notice effect is completed without further progressing (to the next stage). Then, the specific effect (game effect, reach effect) corresponding to the selected specific effect suggestion image is executed.

FIG. 65 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (b). FIG. 65B shows a scene in which the movement display of the selection cursor 214 is confirmed and displayed in the next step transition suggestion image 213 at the lower right in the first stage effect image of the step-up notice effect. That is, since the next step transition suggestion image 213 is selected in the first-stage effect image, it is confirmed that the process proceeds to the second-stage effect image. FIG. 66 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 65 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 65 (c). Further, FIG. 66 (d) shows a scene in which the next step transition suggestion image 213 selected in the first-stage effect image is enlarged and displayed to obtain a predetermined display mode. This is the first stage of the step-up notice effect 211.

FIG. 66 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (d). FIG. 66 (e) shows a scene in which the effect image of the step-up notice effect 211 being executed is stepped up and the effect image of the second stage is displayed. In the second stage effect image, the effect image to be displayed is a different combination from the previous effect image due to the switching of the effect image (due to the progress display in the next effect image). That is, in the step-up notice effect 211 of the present embodiment, the effect image (one or more of the specific effect suggestion image and / or the next step transition suggestion image) is different as the effect image progresses. It is a feature that it becomes (combination of).

The second-stage effect image shown in FIG. 66 (e) includes four types of effect images: a battle effect suggestion image 212d, a fishing effect suggestion image 212a, a batting effect suggestion image 212b, and a next step transition suggestion image 213. It is composed of a combination of. Compared with the production image of the first stage, the jackpot reliability is changed from 3 shoot production suggestion images 212c with "☆" to 5 battle production suggestion images 212d, and the other production images are changed. do not have. Overall, the combination of the first-stage production image and the second-stage production image is different. Further, since the image is changed to a specific effect suggestion image with high jackpot reliability and the selection mode is changed to be advantageous to the player, in such a case, it is possible to enhance the game interest of the player. Of course, when one or more of the specific effect suggestion images are changed, one of them may be changed to the specific effect suggestion image having a low jackpot reliability.

Further, in the case where one or a plurality of specific effect suggestion images are changed by changing the step-up notice effect to the progress display, the specific effect suggestion image having a lower jackpot reliability than the specific effect suggestion image before the change is specified. It may not change to the effect suggestion image. That is, when the combination of the effect images changes, it changes to a specific effect suggestion image having the same jackpot reliability or a specific effect suggestion image having a higher jackpot reliability. As a result, the player can expect an improvement in the jackpot reliability of the specific effect suggestion image at that time if the step-up notice effect is displayed in progress (if the next step transition suggestion image 213 is selected). It is possible to diversify the points (timing) that enhance the player's interest in playing games.

FIG. 66 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (e). FIG. 66 (f) shows a scene in which the movement display of the selection cursor 214 is confirmed and displayed in the next step transition suggestion image 213 at the lower right in the second stage effect image of the step-up notice effect. That is, since the next step transition suggestion image 213 is selected in the second-stage effect image, it is confirmed that the process proceeds to the third-stage effect image. Although the display position of the next step transition suggestion image 213 does not change, the display position of the next step transition suggestion image 213 may be moved when the effect image is progressively displayed. Further, when the player moves from the previous display position or moves to a specific position, the jackpot reliability of notifying the player may be increased.

FIG. 67 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 66 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 66 (f). Further, FIG. 67 (g) shows a scene in which the next step transition suggestion image 213 selected in the second stage effect image is enlarged and displayed to obtain a predetermined display mode. This is the second stage of the step-up notice effect 211.

FIG. 67 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (g). FIG. 67 (h) shows a scene in which the effect image of the step-up notice effect 211 being executed is stepped up and the effect image of the third stage is displayed. In the third stage effect image, the effect image is switched (due to the progress display on the next effect image), so that the displayed effect image is a different combination from the previous (second stage) effect image. There is. The third-stage effect image shown in FIG. 67 (h) includes four types of effect images: a battle effect suggestion image 212d, a shoot effect suggestion image 212c, a batting effect suggestion image 212b, and a next step transition suggestion image 213. It is composed of a combination of.

Compared with the second stage production image, the fishing effect suggestion image 212a with one jackpot reliability of "☆" has changed to the shoot effect suggestion image 212c with three "☆", and the other production images have changed. do not have. As a whole, the combination of the effect images is different between the second stage effect image and the third stage effect image. Further, even when the first-stage effect image and the third-stage effect image are compared, the combination of the effect images is different. Further, since the image is changed to a specific effect suggestion image with high jackpot reliability and the selection mode is changed to be advantageous to the player, in such a case, it is possible to enhance the game interest of the player.

FIG. 67 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (h). FIG. 67 (i) shows a scene in which the movement display of the selection cursor 214 is confirmed and displayed by the battle effect suggestion image 212d on the upper left in the effect image of the third stage of the step-up notice effect. That is, since the predetermined specific effect suggestion image 212 is selected in the third stage effect image, the selected specific effect suggestion image (battle effect suggestion) is not displayed on the fourth stage (next) effect image. It is shown that a specific effect (battle effect) corresponding to the image) is executed.

FIG. 68 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 67 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 67 (i). Further, FIG. 67 (i) shows a scene in which the battle effect suggestion image 212d selected in the third stage effect image is enlarged and displayed to obtain a predetermined display mode. This is the third stage of the step-up notice effect 211. In the step-up notice effect 211, it is said that the higher the number of times the displayed image is displayed, the higher the reliability of the jackpot notifying the player than when the number of times the displayed image is displayed is small. Further, in the step-up notice effect 211, it is more likely that a specific effect (reach effect) with high jackpot reliability is selected when the number of times the displayed image is displayed is large than when the number of times the display image is displayed is small.

FIG. 68 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 68 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 68 (j). Further, FIG. 68 (k) shows a scene in which the step-up notice effect 211 is finished, and the battle effect 216 (battle reach) suggested by the battle effect suggestion image 212d is started following the step-up notice effect 211. There is. At this time, two left and right symbols of the effect symbol 8 are displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the reach mode "7 ↓ 7" on the left and right upper ends of the display screen 7a. As described above, when the ally character defeats the enemy character in this battle effect 216, the effect symbol in the reach mode is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol "777", and the jackpot becomes a jackpot.

In the execution mode of the step-up notice effect 211 described above, an example will be described in which the number of images (specific effect suggestion image and / or next step transition suggestion image) constituting the effect image is the same (4) before and after the progress display. did. Not limited to such an execution mode, the number of images constituting the effect image may change before and after the progress display. FIG. 69 (l) shows an effect image of a predetermined stage of the step-up notice effect 211. The effect image is composed of a combination of three types of effect images: a batting effect suggestion image 212b, a fishing effect suggestion image 212a, and a next step transition suggestion image 213.

Further, FIG. 69 (l) shows a scene in which the movement display of the selection cursor 214 is confirmed and displayed by the character step transition suggestion image 213 in the lower center in the effect image of the predetermined stage of the step-up notice effect. That is, since the next step transition suggestion image 213 is selected in the effect image of the predetermined stage, it is confirmed that the process proceeds to the effect image of the next stage (next step). FIG. 69 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (l) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (l). Further, FIG. 69 (m) shows a scene in which the next step transition suggestion image 213 selected in the effect image of the predetermined stage is enlarged and displayed to be in a predetermined display mode.

FIG. 69 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 69 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 69 (m). FIG. 67 (n) shows a scene in which the effect image of the step-up notice effect 211 being executed is stepped up and the effect image of the next stage of the predetermined stage is displayed. In the production image, the display production image has a different combination from the previous production image due to the switching of the production image (due to the progress display in the next production image), and the display production image (specification). The number of production suggestion images and / or next step transition suggestion images) is increasing (changing). As a result, the effect images shown in FIG. 69 (n) are four types of effect images: a battle effect suggestion image 212d, a shoot effect suggestion image 212c, a batting effect suggestion image 212b, and a next step transition suggestion image 213. It is composed of combinations.

Comparing the production images before and after these, the fishing effect suggestion image 212a with a jackpot reliability of "☆" disappears, the battle production 212d with a jackpot reliability of "☆" and 3 with a jackpot reliability of "☆". The shoot effect suggestion image 212c of the above is newly displayed. That is, the newly displayed specific effect suggestion image 212 is a production image having a higher jackpot reliability than the hidden specific effect suggestion image 212. As a result, when the number of the specific effect suggestion image 212 displayed is increased, it is possible to enhance the game interest of the player. Further, in addition to such an execution mode, the number of displayed effect images (specific effect suggestion image and / or next step transition suggestion image) may be reduced by displaying the progress. Further, when the number is reduced, the effect image having the lowest jackpot reliability among the displayed effect images (specific effect suggestion image and / or next step transition suggestion image) may be hidden. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's playing interest when there is a decrease display.

In the execution mode of the step-up notice effect 211 described above, an execution mode in which all of the displayed effect images are different effect images has been described. In addition to such an execution mode, the same effect image (specific effect suggestion image and / or next step transition suggestion image) may be included in a part or all of the displayed effect image. FIG. 70 (o) shows an effect image of a predetermined stage of the step-up notice effect 211. The effect image is composed of a combination of three types of a batting effect suggestion image 212b, a shoot effect suggestion image 212c, and two battle effect suggestion images 212d, and four effect images. In this execution mode, an example is shown in which the effect image is configured to include a plurality of the same specific effect suggestion images (battle effect suggestion images). Further, the effect image is composed of only the specific effect suggestion image, and does not include the next step transition suggestion image. In such a case, it is shown to the player that there is a high possibility that the battle effect suggestion image displayed in the largest number is selected, and the step advance notice effect 211 being executed moves to the next stage. It is indicated that it does not (progress is not displayed).

Further, FIG. 70 (p) shows an effect image of a predetermined stage of the step-up notice effect 211. The effect images are all composed of the same specific effect suggestion image 212 (four battle effect suggestion images 212d). In this way, when the effect images are all composed of the same specific effect suggestion image, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the effect image is composed of a plurality of types of specific effect suggestion images. Further, when all the effect images are composed of the same specific effect suggestion image, the jackpot may be confirmed no matter which specific effect suggestion image is selected.

Further, FIG. 70 (q) shows an effect image of a predetermined stage of the step-up notice effect 211. The effect image is composed of a plurality of (two) next step transition suggestion images 213. It is considered that the larger the number of the next step transition suggestion image 213 (the ratio of the number of displayed images) is, the higher the possibility that the next step transition suggestion image 213 is selected and the predetermined display mode is obtained than when the number is small. As a result, when the number of the next step transition suggestion images 213 is displayed more, it is more likely to shift to the next stage (next step) than when the number is small, and the player sees the effect image and sees the effect image. It is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game. Further, the effect image may be composed of the next step transition suggestion image 213. In such a case, the step-up notice effect 211 always displays the progress to the next stage, so that the jackpot reliability is improved. As a result, the player can enhance the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the number and types of the advance notice effect species to be determined are maintained. , Only the number of notice effects belonging to the notice effect type is reduced. Therefore, the step-up notice effect 211 described above can be executed in any of the low load state and the high load state, but the number of execution modes differs depending on the state. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced.

Specifically, in the low load state, all the patterns of the step-up notice effect 211 described above may be executed, and in the high load state, some patterns of the step-up notice effect 211 described above may be executed. For example, in a low load state, all of the fishing effect suggestion image 212a, the batting effect suggestion image 212b, the shoot effect suggestion image 212c, and the battle effect suggestion image 212d can be displayed as the specific effect suggestion image displayed in the effect image. , The number of specific effect suggestion images and next step transition suggestion images can be changed from the previous effect image. On the other hand, in the high load state, only the batting effect suggestion image 212b and the battle effect suggestion image 212d can be executed, and the number of the specific effect suggestion image and the next step transition suggestion image cannot be changed from the previous effect image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control processing load of the step-up notice effect and display a highly reliable specific effect suggestion image, reduce the control load in a high load state, and prevent the deterioration of the game interest as much as possible. It becomes possible to do. Further, in the above-described execution mode, more execution modes may be executed in the low load state than in the high load state.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the step-up notice effect 211 is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the low load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the low load state, and cannot be executed in the high load state. As a notice effect, it may be a notice effect that cannot be determined at the notice determination table for a high load state. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, diversify the execution mode of the advance notice effect, and optimize the control process applied to the game effect control unit. Become.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the step-up notice effect 211 is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the high load state, and cannot be executed in the low load state. As a notice effect, it may be a notice effect that cannot be determined at the notice determination table for a low load state. Even in such an aspect, the advance notice effect to be determined is changed according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, the execution mode of the advance notice effect is diversified, and the control process applied to the game effect control unit is optimized. It becomes possible.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 7 will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the step-up notice effect 220 (progress effect, step-up notice) in which the advance notice effect (conversation notice, step-up notice, etc.) and the execution mode (effect mode, display mode) described in the first embodiment are different will be described. .. Similar to the first embodiment, the step-up notice effect can be a decision target (executable) notice effect in both the low load state and the high load state. As a result, it is possible to reduce only the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type while maintaining the number and types of the advance notice effect species as much as possible (without reducing as much as possible).

Next, the step-up notice effect 220, which is the advance notice effect of the seventh embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 76. FIG. 71 shows the components constituting the step-up notice effect 220. Specifically, the step-up notice effect 220 (button operation notice effect 224) includes a frame image 221 (display frame) displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a (game effect display unit) and a display screen 7a (game effect display). The button image 222 (input image, input instruction image, button effect image) displayed adjacent to the frame image 221 of the section) and the in-frame effect image 223 (effect image) displayed in the frame image 221. It is configured to include (see FIG. 72 (b) and the like). Further, the step-up notice effect 220 is a game effect in which the player operates the effect button 63 to advance (change the effect) the effect according to the button image 222 that suggests (instructs) the operation of the effect button. .. Therefore, the step-up notice effect 220 is also referred to as a button operation notice effect 224 (input effect).

Further, the step-up notice effect 220 has a plurality of display modes, respectively, as display modes of the frame image 221 and the button image 222, and the frame-in-frame effect image 223, and the frame image 221 and the button image 222 and the frame-in-frame effect image 223. The jackpot reliability notified to the player differs depending on the display mode of 223 and / or the combination of the display modes (that is, the display mode of the step-up notice effect 220). In all of the frame image 221 and the button image 222, and the in-frame effect image 223, the second display mode has a higher jackpot reliability than the first display mode, and the third display mode has a higher jackpot reliability than the second display mode. It is set.

The frame image 221a of the first display mode is a frame image in which the outer circumference is surrounded by a white frame. Further, the frame image 221b of the second display mode is a frame image in which the outer circumference is surrounded by a red frame. Further, the frame image 221c of the third display mode is a frame image in which the outer circumference is surrounded by a gold frame. The button image 222a of the first display mode is a combination of an operation instruction in white characters of "press!" And a white effect button image (input instruction image). The operation instruction of "press!" Indicates that the effect button 63 is pressed once at an arbitrary timing within the operation valid period of the effect button determined in advance. Further, the period during which the effect button image 222 is displayed on the display screen 7a is regarded as the operation valid period, and the period during which the effect button image 222 is not displayed is the operation invalid period (operation invalid period) in the step-up notice effect 220. Period).

Further, the button image 222b of the second display mode is a combination of an operation instruction in white characters of "continuous hitting!" And a white effect button image (input instruction image). The operation instruction of "continuous hitting!" Instructs that the effect button 63 is pressed a plurality of times (repeatedly) at an arbitrary timing within a predetermined operation valid period of the effect button. Further, the button image 222c of the third display mode is a combination of the operation instruction in red characters of "continuous hitting!" And the red effect button image (input instruction image). By changing the color of the button image, the player can easily grasp that the jackpot reliability is high.

The in-frame effect image 223 is a game effect executed in the predetermined frame image 221 described above, and as the game effect, an effect of determining an enemy character to battle with a ally character 225 is executed. Then, when the enemy character fighting with the ally character 225 is determined, the battle reach in which the determined enemy character with the ally character 225 fights is executed following (after) the step-up notice effect 220 being executed. In this battle reach, when the ally character wins the enemy character, it becomes a big hit and the big hit game is executed, and when the ally character loses (cannot win the enemy character), it becomes a big hit and the big hit game is not executed. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the enemy character fighting.

The battle reach (Battle Reach Z229) in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Z fight is more reliable than the battle reach (Battle Reach Y) in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Y fight. Further, the battle reach (Battle Reach Y) in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Y fight is higher in jackpot reliability than the battle reach (Battle Reach X) in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character X fight. Therefore, the player sees the step-up advance notice effect 220 (button operation advance notice effect 224) in the expectation that the in-frame effect image 223c suggesting the execution of the battle reach Z will be executed as the in-frame effect image 223. ..

The in-frame effect image 223a of the first display mode is an effect image suggesting the execution of the battle reach X in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character X226 fight. Further, the in-frame effect image 223b of the second display mode is an effect image suggesting the execution of the battle reach Y in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Y227 fight. Further, the in-frame effect image 223c of the third display mode is an effect image suggesting the execution of the battle reach Z in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Z228 fight.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the step-up advance notice effect 220 (button operation advance notice effect 224), the player operates (changes) the effect being executed by operating the effect button 63 in a predetermined operation mode. However, the player operates the effect button 63 in a predetermined operation mode to advance (change) the effect image 223 in the frame. Specifically, in each of the in-frame effect images 223a to 223, the enemy character X is initially displayed as an enemy character that fights (fights) the ally character 225, and the player operates the effect button 63. Correspondingly, the image changes, the enemy character X changes to the enemy character Y, and the enemy character Y changes to the enemy character Z. Further, as another execution mode, there may be a mode in which the enemy character Z changes to the enemy character Y or X, or the enemy character Y changes to the enemy character X.

FIG. 72A shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of "○") are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. ing. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e in the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may show the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 72 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (a). In the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, a button operation notice effect 224 (progress effect, step-up notice effect 220, input effect), which will be described later, is executed. The button operation notice effect 224 is determined by stepwise switching and displaying the in-frame effect image (effect image) displayed in the frame image 221 in response to the operation of the player's effect button 63. Indicates the execution of the game effect (character effect, reach effect), indicates the reliability of the jackpot, and indicates that the step-up advance notice effect (button operation advance notice effect) being executed shifts (progresses) to the next stage. It is a notice production. Further, the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) is a notice effect indicating the feasibility of the jackpot game, and any game effect (reach effect, battle reach) is executed in the button operation notice effect 224. Depending on what is suggested, the feasibility of different jackpot games is shown.

Further, the button operation notice effect 224 is a notice effect capable of gradually switching and displaying the effect image, but an execution mode (first display mode 223a) ending with a one-stage effect image and a two-stage effect. It has an execution mode (second display mode 223b) that ends by displaying an image, and an execution mode (third display mode 223c) that ends by displaying a three-stage effect image, and has a jackpot reliability (selected variation pattern). ) And the step-up notice effect determination based on the acquired random value for the step-up notice effect, etc., determine any of the execution modes.

The button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) shown in FIG. 72B is a scene in which the first stage effect image is displayed. As the first stage image, the white frame image 221a of the first display mode is displayed on the display screen 7a, the white button image 222b of the second display mode displayed on the left side of the frame image 221a, and the in-frame effect. As image 223, a scene in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character X confront each other is displayed. Then, the button image 222b instructs the player to repeatedly hit the effect button.

FIG. 72 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (b). In FIG. 72 (c), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 according to the operation instruction of the effect button to the player by the button image 222b, and the button operation notice effect 224 (in-frame effect image 223 and button image) is obtained by the continuous operation. 222b) shows a scene where it is changing (progressing). Specifically, the display mode in which the button symbol imitating the effect button is repeatedly pressed in response to the player's continuous operation of the effect button 63 is shown, and the characters "continuously hit!" In the operation instruction are also repeatedly hit. Indicates a display mode indicating that the image is present.

In the in-frame effect image 223 displayed in the frame image 221a, the ally character 225 tries to defeat the enemy character X (try to push it out of the frame) in response to the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 63. Running. If the ally character 225 succeeds in defeating the enemy character X (pushing it out of the frame), the enemy character switches from the enemy character X to the enemy character Y, and two stages in the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220). Moves (switches) to the production image of the eyes. If the ally character 225 fails to defeat the enemy character X226 (push it out of the frame), the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) ends in the first stage, and the ally character 225 battles with the enemy character X226. X is confirmed, and then the battle reach X is started. The first display mode 223a is set for the in-frame effect image 223 at that time.

FIG. 73 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (c). In FIG. 72 (d), similarly to FIG. 72 (c), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 according to the operation instruction of the effect button to the player by the button image 222b, and the button operation notice effect 224 is obtained by the continuous operation. (In-frame effect image 223 and button image 222b) shows a scene in which it is changing (progressing). In the in-frame effect image 223 displayed in the frame image 221a, the ally character 225 defeats the enemy character X in response to the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 63. As a result, the player is shown to shift to the second stage effect image in the button operation advance notice effect 224 (step-up advance notice effect 220).

FIG. 73 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 72 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 72 (d). FIG. 72 (e) shows a scene in which the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) is shifted to the second stage effect image, and the white frame image 221a of the first display mode is displayed on the display screen 7a. The frame image 221a displays a white button image 222b of the second display mode displayed on the left side, and a scene in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Y confront each other as the in-frame effect image 223. Then, the button image 222b instructs the player to repeatedly hit the effect button.

In this execution mode, the operation of the effect button is effective before and after the stage of the effect of the button operation advance notice effect 224 (step-up advance notice effect 220) progresses (for example, between FIGS. 73 (d) and (e)). The operation validity period (input validity period) is set. In this mode, the operation of the effect button is invalidated before and after the stage of the effect during the button operation notice effect 224 (for example, between FIGS. 73 (d) and 73 (e)) (for example, the effect button). An operation invalid period (input invalid period) may be provided so that the effect being executed is not changed by the operation. According to such an aspect, a plurality of operation valid periods (input valid periods) are set in the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220), and each time the stage progresses, the player is asked to operate the effect button again. It is possible to enhance the game's interest by encouraging the game to give a sharp impression to the game production. In addition, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the stage of the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) has progressed by his / her own operation.

FIG. 73 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 73 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 73 (e). In FIG. 73 (f), similarly to FIG. 72 (c), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 according to the operation instruction of the effect button to the player by the button image 222b, and the button operation notice effect 224 is performed by the continuous operation. (In-frame effect image 223 and button image 222b) shows a scene in which it is changing (progressing).

In the in-frame effect image 223 displayed in the frame image 221a, the ally character 225 tries to defeat the enemy character Y in response to the player's continuous hitting operation of the effect button 63. When the ally character 225 succeeds in defeating the enemy character Y, the enemy character switches to the enemy character Y and the enemy character Z228, and becomes the third stage effect image in the button operation advance notice effect 224 (step-up advance notice effect 220). Migrate (switch). If the ally character 225 fails to defeat the enemy character Y227, the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) ends in the second stage, and the ally character 225 has a battle reach Y with the enemy character Y227. After that, it shifts to Battle Reach Y. The second display mode 223b is set for the in-frame effect image 223 at that time.

FIG. 74 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 73 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 73 (f). In FIG. 74 (g), similarly to FIG. 73 (d), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 according to the operation instruction of the effect button to the player by the button image 222b, and the button operation notice effect 224 is obtained by the continuous operation. It shows a scene in which (the effect image 223 in the frame and the button image 222b) are changing (progressing). In the in-frame effect image 223 displayed in the frame image 221a, an effect in which the ally character 225 defeats the enemy character Y227 is displayed in response to the repeated hitting operation of the player's effect button 63. As a result, the player is shown to shift to the third stage effect image in the button operation advance notice effect 224 (step-up advance notice effect 220).

FIG. 74 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 74 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 74 (g). FIG. 74 (g) shows a scene in which the effect image of the third stage (final stage) in the button operation advance notice effect 224 (step-up advance notice effect 220) is transferred, and the white border of the first display mode is displayed on the display screen 7a. The frame image 221a, the white button image 222b of the second display mode displayed on the left side of the frame image 221a, and the scene in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Z228 face each other as the in-frame effect image 223 are displayed. Then, two dogleg-shaped bars are displayed on the left side of the frame image 221a, and the process has shifted to the third stage (final stage) effect image in the button operation advance notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220). That is, a stage confirmation display unit indicating that the button operation notice effect 224 has not progressed any more and has been confirmed is displayed.

By looking at this stage confirmation display unit, the player clarifies that the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) has shifted to the effect image of the third stage (final stage) with the highest jackpot reliability. Recognize to. In FIG. 74 (h), the button image 222b is displayed, but since the stage of the button operation notice effect 224 does not progress any further, the third stage in-frame effect image 223 is displayed (confirmed). At the stage, the display of the button image 222b may be terminated (omitted). From this, it can be seen that the in-frame effect image 223 executed in FIGS. 72 (b) to 74 (h) was the third display mode 223c.

FIG. 74 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 74 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 74 (h). FIG. 74 (i) shows a scene in which the battle reach Z229 confirmed by the effect of the button operation advance notice effect 224 is executed following the button operation advance notice effect 224 (step-up advance notice effect 220). Compared with other battle reach (X, Y), the battle reach Z229 has a high reliability of the jackpot shown to the player, so that the player raises the expectation for the jackpot and enhances the game entertainment.

FIG. 75 shows a button operation notice effect 224 having an execution mode (combination of display modes) different from that of the button operation notice effect 224 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74. The description of the execution mode (execution pattern) of the button operation notice effect 224 shown in FIG. 75 will be omitted (simplified) with respect to the portion overlapping with the execution mode described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. FIG. 75 (j) shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. At the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, the button operation notice effect 224 is executed. The button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) shown in FIG. 75 (j) is a scene in which the effect image of the first stage is displayed. As the first stage image, the red-rimmed frame image 221b of the second display mode, the white button image 222b of the second display mode displayed on the left side of the frame image 221b, and the in-frame effect are displayed on the display screen 7a. As image 223, a scene in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character X confront each other is displayed. Then, the button image 222b instructs the player to repeatedly hit the effect button.

Here, unlike the above-described execution mode, in the present execution mode, the display mode of the frame image is the second display mode 221b, so that the jackpot reliability shown to the player is the first display mode of the frame image. It is higher than the case of 221a. Further, when the display mode of the frame image is the second display mode 221b, the result of the progress of the in-frame effect image 223 is more likely to progress to the enemy character Z than in the case of the first display mode 221a. May be. Further, when the display mode of the frame image is the third display mode 221c, the possibility of progressing to the enemy character Z may be further increased.

FIG. 75 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 75 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 75 (j). In FIG. 75 (k), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 according to the operation instruction of the effect button to the player by the button image 222b, and the second stage from the first stage effect image shown in FIG. 75 (j). Further, it shows a scene in which the button operation notice effect 224 (in-frame effect image 223 and button image 222b) is changed (progressed) by the continuous hitting operation after shifting to the effect image.

In the in-frame effect image 223 displayed in the frame image 221a, the ally character 225 executes an effect of trying to defeat the enemy character Y in response to the repeated hitting operation of the player's effect button 63, and the ally character 225 performs an effect. It shows a scene being pushed by the enemy character Y. FIG. 75 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 75 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 75 (k). In FIG. 75 (l), the ally character 225 cannot defeat the enemy character Y, and the stage confirmation display unit is displayed on the left side of the frame image 221b in the second stage effect image, and the button operation notice effect 224 (step up). It shows the scene where the progress of the advance notice production 220) is completed. As a result, it is confirmed that the battle reach Y is executed (after) following the button operation notice effect 224.

FIG. 76 shows a button operation notice effect 224 having an execution mode (combination of display modes) different from that of the button operation notice effect 224 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 and 75. FIG. 76 shows an example in which the display mode of the frame image and / or the display mode of the button image changes to a display mode with high jackpot reliability as the stage of the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) progresses. explain. Further, the description of the execution mode (execution pattern) of the button operation notice effect 224 shown in FIG. 76 is omitted (simplified) with respect to the portion overlapping with the execution modes (execution patterns) shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 and 75. I will explain.

FIG. 76 (m) shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. At the substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, the button operation notice effect 224 is executed. The button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) shown in FIG. 76 (m) is a scene in which the effect image of the first stage is displayed. As the first stage image, the white frame image 221a of the first display mode, the white button image 222a of the first display mode displayed on the left side of the frame image 221a, and the in-frame effect are displayed on the display screen 7a. As image 223, a scene in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character X confront each other is displayed. Then, the button image 222a instructs the player to press the effect button (press once).

FIG. 76 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (m). In FIG. 76 (n), the player presses the effect button 63 (presses once) according to the operation instruction (pressing instruction) of the effect button to the player by the button image 222a shown in FIG. 76 (m). It shows a scene in which the button operation notice effect 224 shown in 76 (n) is shifted to the second stage effect image. In this second-stage effect image, the red-rimmed frame image 221b of the second display mode, the white button image 222b of the second display mode displayed on the left side of the frame image 221b, and the frame are displayed on the display screen 7a. A scene in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Y confront each other is displayed as the internal production image 223. The button image 222b instructs the player to repeatedly hit the effect button.

As described above, in this execution mode, as the effect image progresses from the first stage to the second stage by the player's effect button 63 operation, the in-frame effect image 223 is displayed, and the ally character 225 and the enemy character X are displayed. The scene in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Y confront each other progresses from the confronting scene, and the display mode of the frame image 221 and the display mode of the button image 222 also change to a display mode with high jackpot reliability. .. As a result, a notice effect (game effect) with higher reliability of the jackpot is executed, and the player is shown that the result of the variable display during execution is likely to be a jackpot, giving a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. It will be possible to further increase it. In addition, this will enhance the interest of the game.

FIG. 76 (o) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 76 (n) in the same variation display as in FIG. 76 (n). In FIG. 76 (o), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63 according to the operation instruction (continuous hit operation) of the effect button to the player by the button image 222b shown in FIG. 76 (n), and is shown in FIG. 76 (o). It shows a scene in which the effect image is shifted to the third stage (final stage) of the button operation notice effect 224. In this third-stage effect image, the frame image 221c of the gold edge of the third display mode, the red button image 222c of the third display mode displayed on the left side of the frame image 221c, and the inside of the frame are displayed on the display screen 7a. As the production image 223, a scene in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Z confront each other is displayed. The button image 222c instructs the player to repeatedly hit the effect button.

Similar to the above, as the effect image progresses from the second stage to the third stage by the player's effect button 63 operation, the in-frame effect image 223 is a scene in which the ally character 225 and the enemy character Y confront each other. Therefore, while proceeding to the scene where the ally character 225 and the enemy character Z confront each other, the display mode of the frame image 221 and the display mode of the button image 222 have a third display mode (frame image 221c and button image) with higher jackpot reliability. It has changed to 222c) and is progressing. As a result, a notice effect (game effect) with higher reliability of the jackpot is executed, and the player is shown that the result of the variable display during execution is likely to be a jackpot, giving a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. It will be possible to further increase it. In addition, this will enhance the interest of the game.

Further, as another execution mode, as the stage of the effect image progresses, only one of the display modes of the frame image 221 and the button image 222 may be changed to a display mode having high jackpot reliability. Further, when the display modes of the frame image 221 and the button image 222 are changed, the display mode is not changed to the jackpot reliability display mode that is one step higher, but is changed from the first display mode to the third display mode. As the stage of the image progresses by one step, the display mode may be changed to a display mode having a high hit reliability by a plurality of steps. Further, the progress stages of the frame image 221 and the button image 222 and the in-frame effect image may be different. For example, when the in-frame effect image 223 progresses by one step (changes from enemy character X to enemy character Y), the button image 222 changes by one step (changes from repeated hit white to repeated hit red), and the frame image 221 changes by two steps. (Many stages) May change (change from white frame to gold frame). Further, when the stage of the button operation notice effect 224 progresses by one stage (changes from the first stage to the second stage), the display mode of the effect image in the frame progresses by a plurality of stages (from enemy character X to enemy character Z). Changes) may have.

Further, with respect to the combination of the frame image 221 (determined), the button image 222, and the in-frame effect image 223 executed (determined) by the button operation notice effect 224, a plurality of modes in which these are combined are provided in advance, and the button operation notice effect display is provided. The mode determining means (sub-control unit, display mode determining means) may select and determine the mode to be executed from these. Specifically, as a mode in which these are combined, for example, a frame image 221a, a button image 222a and an in-frame effect image 223a are used as the first combination, and a frame image 221b, a button image 222b and an in-frame effect image 223b are used as the second combination. The third combination is the frame image 221c, the button image 222c and the in-frame effect image 223c, the fourth combination is the frame image 221a, the button image 222a and the in-frame effect image 223b, and the fifth combination is the frame image 221a, the button image 222a and the in-frame. Effect image 223c, frame image 221b, button image 222a and frame effect image 223a as the sixth combination, frame image 221c, button image 222a and frame effect image 223c as the seventh combination, frame image 221b, button image as the eighth combination. 222b and in-frame effect image 223a, frame image 221a as the ninth combination, button image 222c and in-frame effect image 223b, frame image 221a, button image 222b and in-frame effect image 223c as the tenth combination (more combinations A control mode may be provided in which the button operation notice effect display mode determining means (sub-control unit) selects and executes any combination.

Further, as other control modes, a frame image display mode determining means (sub control unit, frame display mode determining means), a button image display mode determining means (sub control unit, input image mode determining means), and an in-frame effect image. It has a display mode determining means (sub control unit, image display mode determining means), and the frame image display mode determining means (sub control unit) is based on predetermined selection conditions (variation pattern information, notice random number information, etc.). The frame image 221 (first display mode 221a to third display mode 221c) is selected, and the button image display mode determining means (sub-control unit) presses the button based on predetermined selection conditions (variation pattern information, notice random number information, etc.). Image 222 (first display mode 222a to third display mode 222c) is selected, and the in-frame effect image display mode determining means (sub-control unit) is based on predetermined selection conditions (variation pattern information, notice random number information, etc.). The in-frame effect image 223 (first display mode 223a to third display mode 223c) may be selected. In this case, the frame image display mode determining means (sub control unit), the button image display mode determining means (sub control unit), and the in-frame effect image display mode determining means (sub control unit) are independent of each other. Since the display mode is selected and determined, it is possible to determine various execution modes of the button operation notice effect 224 without storing the combination information.

In principle, when the first display mode is selected as the in-frame effect image 223, the button operation advance notice effect 224 becomes a one-step advance notice effect (game effect), and the second in-frame effect image 223 is used. When the display mode is selected, the button operation notice effect 224 becomes a two-stage notice effect (game effect), and when the third display mode is selected as the in-frame effect image 223, the button operation notice effect 224. Is a three-stage notice production (game production).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the number and types of the advance notice effect species to be determined are maintained. , Only the number of notice effects belonging to the notice effect type is reduced. Therefore, the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) described above can be executed in any of the low load state and the high load state, but the number of execution modes differs depending on the state. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced.

Specifically, in the low load state, all the patterns of the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) described above can be executed, and in the high load state, the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) described above can be executed. ) May be executable. For example, in the low load state, all the display modes from the first display mode to the third display mode can be displayed as the display modes of the frame image 221 and the button image 222 and the frame-in-frame effect image 223. Alternatively, when a combination of display modes of the frame image 221 and the button image 222 and the in-frame effect image 223 is set, all the combinations can be executed (selection target).

On the other hand, in the high load state, only the first display mode or the third display mode can be executed (selection target) as the display modes of the frame image 221 and the button image 222 and the frame-in-frame effect image 223. Alternatively, when a combination of display modes of the frame image 221 and the button image 222 and the in-frame effect image 223 is set, a part of the combination can be executed (selection target). That is, in a high load state, it has a display mode and / or a combination that cannot be executed (not selected). As a result, the control processing load of the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) can be reduced, and a highly reliable notice image can be displayed, reducing the control load in a high load state and playing a game. It is possible to prevent the decline in interest as much as possible. Further, in the above-described execution mode, more execution modes may be executed in the low load state than in the high load state.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the low load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the low load state. As a notice effect that cannot be executed in a high load state, a notice effect that cannot be determined in the notice determination table for a high load state may be used. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, diversify the execution mode of the advance notice effect, and optimize the control process applied to the game effect control unit. Become.

Further, instead of such an embodiment, the button operation notice effect 224 (step-up notice effect 220) is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the high load state. As a notice effect that cannot be executed in the low load state, the notice effect that cannot be determined in the notice determination table for the low load state may be used. Even in such an aspect, the advance notice effect to be determined is changed according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, the execution mode of the advance notice effect is diversified, and the control process applied to the game effect control unit is optimized. It becomes possible.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 8 will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the advance reach notice effect 232 (advance notification effect) in which the advance notice effect (conversation notice, step-up notice, etc.) and the execution mode (effect mode, display mode) described in the first embodiment are different will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the advance reach notice effect 232 can be a decision target (executable) notice effect in both the low load state and the high load state. As a result, it is possible to reduce only the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type while maintaining the number and types of the advance notice effect species as much as possible (without reducing as much as possible).

Next, the advance reach notice effect 232, which is the advance notice effect of the eighth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 81. The advance reach notice effect 232 is also referred to as "acquired information", which is information acquired when the game ball enters the starting port (first starting port or second starting port) (various information such as random numbers for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not). ) Is the advance notice effect (game effect) to be executed when the specific information (specific acquisition information) is used. Further, in the advance reach notice effect 232, the special symbol (effect symbol) related to the specific information is stored before the change start condition of the special symbol (effect symbol) related to the specific information is satisfied. This is a pre-production (look-ahead effect) that starts an effect that suggests the content of the variable display (including the game effect to be executed and the result). In addition, "suggesting the content of the variable display of the special symbol (directed symbol) related to the specific information" refers to the type of game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol (directed symbol) related to the specific information. It means suggesting / notifying, or suggesting / notifying the result of variable display of a special symbol (directed symbol) related to specific information (possibility of becoming a big hit, big hit type, etc.).

FIG. 77A shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), two first effect hold 9a (pictures of "○") are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. ing. It is shown that there are two undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e in the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may show the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 77 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 77 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 77 (a). During the variable display of the effect symbol, a new game ball enters the first start port 20, and there are three first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit). This indicates that the number of hold information (acquisition information, game information) held in the first special figure hold storage unit (first acquisition information storage means) has increased. Further, the newly stored hold information is specific information (specific acquisition information), and the first effect hold 9a is different from other display modes in order to show the player that the hold information is the specific information 231. It is represented by (black circle "●").

In FIG. 77 (c), in the same variation display as in FIG. 77 (b), after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. Shows the scene. FIG. 77 (d) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 77 (c) is started. As shown in FIG. 77 (d), the first effect hold 9a, which is specific information, is shifted from the position of hold 3 to the position of hold 2. FIG. 78 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 78 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 78 (d). FIG. 78 (e) shows the advance reach notice effect 232 (advance) that suggests (notifies) the content of the variation display of the effect symbol (special symbol) related to the specific information 231 (specific acquisition information) of “●” located in the hold 2. Indicates a scene in which the notification effect) is being executed.

The advance reach notice effect 232 of the execution mode shown in FIG. 78 (e) has three types (three) of ally character display units 232a, 232b, and 232c (effects) in a predetermined display area (effect display unit) of the display screen 7a. Seed display unit) is provided. The advance reach notice effect 232 is an effect that gives advance notice of which reach effect (game effect) will be executed in accordance with the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) related to the specific information 231. The advance reach notice effect 232 shown in FIG. 78 (e) suggests (notifies) that a battle reach (battle effect, character effect) is executed as the reach effect to be executed, and further, in the battle reach 237. This is an effect that suggests (notifies) the type of character that appears (type of ally character). Further, a battle reach with different jackpot reliability is executed depending on which of these three types of ally character display units 232a, 232b, and 232c is selected (executed).

Further, the advance reach notice effect 232 erases some of the ally character display units that are not executed from the first stage effect 233 that displays a plurality of (three types) ally character display units shown in FIG. 78 (e). It changes to the (decrease) second stage effect 234 (see FIG. 79 (h)), and finally, it actually changes with the variation display of the effect symbol related to the specific information among the plurality of (3 types) ally character display units. This is an effect that gradually changes (progresses) to the third stage effect 235 (FIG. 80 (j)) that displays only the ally character display unit corresponding to the effect to be executed. Therefore, the advance reach notice production 232 is also referred to as a progress production or a step-up notice production. The first-stage effect and the second-stage effect that display a plurality of ally character display units including both the ally character display unit to be executed and the ally character display unit not to be executed are also referred to as "first notification effect". Further, the third stage effect of displaying only the ally character display unit to be executed is also referred to as "second notification effect".

In FIG. 78 (e), the ally character display unit 232a (friend character E battle notice) on the upper left side of the display screen 7a is a display for notifying that the ally character E will appear in the battle reach in which the ally character and the enemy character fight. Department (advance notice, game production). In addition, as ally characters fighting against enemy characters in battle reach, ally character E, ally character F, and ally character G are provided. Among them, ally character E is weaker, ally character F is stronger than E, and ally. Character G is set as a stronger character than F. In battle reach, if a ally character defeats an enemy character, it will be a big hit, so the battle reach where ally character G appears is considered to be the most reliable battle reach (☆ 3, jackpot reliability 60%), and the ally character The battle reach in which F appears is the next most reliable battle reach (☆ 2, 20% jackpot reliability), and the battle reach in which the ally character E appears is the next most reliable battle reach (most jackpot reliability). It is said to be a battle reach (low degree) (☆ 1 piece, jackpot reliability 5%).

Therefore, when the battle reach is executed, the player plays the game in anticipation of the execution of the battle reach in which the ally character G appears among the ally characters E, F, and G. Then, when the execution of the battle reach in which the ally character G appears is confirmed, the expectation for the big hit is raised and the game entertainment is enhanced. Further, in addition to these execution modes, an ally character H that surely beats the enemy character may be provided (☆ 5, jackpot reliability 100%).

In FIG. 78 (e), the ally character display unit 232b in the upper center of the display screen 7a is a display unit (advance notice, game production) that announces the appearance of the ally character F in the battle reach (friend character F battle). Notice). Further, in FIG. 78 (e), the ally character display unit 232c on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is a display unit (advance notice, game production) that announces the appearance of the ally character G in the battle reach (friend character). G battle notice). Further, the sword character displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 78 (e) is a part of the advance reach notice effect 232. In the pre-reach notice effect 232, the sword character performs an action of cutting a part of a plurality of displayed ally character display units to execute an effect of gradually reducing the pre-reach notice effect 232 that is not executed.

FIG. 78 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 78 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 78 (e). In FIG. 78 (f), among the plurality of (three types) ally character display units displayed in FIG. 78 (e), the ally character display indicating the advance notice effect that is not executed due to the variable display of the effect symbol related to the specific information. The scene where the part is cut with a sword character and a part is reduced is shown. In FIG. 78 (f), an effect of reducing the ally character display unit 232a (advance reach notice effect) is being executed.

FIG. 79 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 78 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 78 (f). In FIG. 79 (g), the ally character display unit 232a is reduced by cutting the ally character display unit 232a with the sword character, and the ally character display unit displayed in the advance reach notice effect 232 is the ally character display unit 232b and the ally character display unit 232b. The scene where the character display unit 232c has the remaining two types (two) is shown. Further, this shows a scene in which the stage of the advance reach notice effect 232 progresses from the first stage effect 233 to the second stage effect 234. In FIG. 79 (h), in the same variation display as in FIG. 79 (g), after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. It shows the scene that was done. On the display screen, the advance reach notice effect 232 is being continued.

FIG. 79 (i) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 79 (h) is started. As shown in FIG. 79 (i), the first effect hold 9a, which is specific information, is shifted from the position of hold 2 to the position of hold 1. Further, FIG. 79 (i) shows a variation display of the effect symbol related to the specific information among the plurality of (two types) ally character display units displayed in the execution scene of the second stage effect 234 in the advance reach notice effect 232. The scene in which the ally character display unit 232b, which indicates the advance notice effect that is not executed in accordance with the above, is cut by the sword character to reduce the effect is shown.

FIG. 80 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 79 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 79 (i). In FIG. 80 (j), the ally character display unit 232b is reduced by cutting the ally character display unit 232b with the sword character, and the ally character display unit displayed in the advance reach notice effect 232 is only the ally character display unit 232c. It shows the scene that became. That is, it is shown that the game effect executed along with the variable display of the effect symbol related to the specific information is confirmed to be the battle reach in which the ally character G with high jackpot reliability (☆ 3) appears. .. Further, this indicates that the stage of the advance reach notice effect 232 has progressed from the second stage effect 234 (first notification effect) to the final stage, the third stage effect 235 (second notification effect).

FIG. 80 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 80 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (j). In FIG. 80 (k), the ally character display unit 232c (friend character G) determined in FIG. 80 (j) described above is displayed from the position from the center of the display screen 7a to the upper left end of the display screen 7a. Move to the position of. In addition, along with the movement display, it is displayed in a smaller size than before, and is displayed on standby until the variable display of the effect symbol related to the specific information starts. As a result, the visibility of other game effects and effects symbols is visible until the variable display of the effect symbols related to the specific information starts and the battle reach 237 (friend character G battle effect) in which the ally character G appears starts. Can be improved. Further, by maintaining the display (stock display) of the ally character display unit 232c or the corresponding symbol on the end of the display screen 7a (effect display unit), the battle reach 237 (friend character) is subsequently displayed. It is possible to clearly show that (G battle production) will be executed, raise expectations for big hits, and enhance the interest of the game.

In FIG. 80 (l), in the same variation display as in FIG. 80 (k), after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. It shows the scene that was done. On the display screen, the advance reach notice effect 232 is being continued. FIG. 81 (m) shows a scene in which the next variation display of FIG. 80 (l) is started. As shown in FIG. 81 (m), the first effect hold 9a, which is specific information, is shifted and displayed as the variable pattern 9f in the variable pattern display area 9e. That is, it shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol related to the specific information has started. On the upper left end of the display screen 7a, the ally character display unit 232c or the corresponding symbol (fixed notice character 236) is continuously displayed in a small size.

In this way, the advance reach notice effect 232 determines which of the game effects (ally character display units) displayed in the first stage effect is executed. , It is executed in the period from the storage of the acquired information related to the specific information to the start of the variable display of the effect symbol related to the specific information. Further, the advance reach notice effect itself is continuously executed even after the acquisition information related to the specific information is stored and the variable display of the effect symbol related to the specific information is started (see FIG. 81 (m)). As another aspect, it is determined in the specific information which of the game effects (friendly character display unit) displayed in the first stage effect is executed. It may be determined after the change display of the effect symbol related to the specific information is started after the acquired information is stored and before the game effect is executed.

FIG. 81 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 81 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 81 (m). FIG. 81 (m) shows a scene in which the left and right production symbols (two two production symbols out of the three production symbols) are stopped and displayed at the same production symbol (“7”) to reach the reach mode. ing. At that time, the ally character display unit 232c, which was displayed in a small size on the upper left end of the display screen 7a, or the corresponding symbol (fixed notice character 236) is changed from the previous display mode. Along with enlarging the display, the display is moved to a position closer to the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates to the player that the battle reach 237 in which the stock-displayed ally character G appears is executed.

FIG. 81 (o) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 81 (n) in the same variation display as in FIG. 81 (n). In FIG. 81 (o), the above-mentioned ally character display unit 232c or the corresponding symbol (fixed notice character 236) is moved and displayed at a position closer to the center of the display screen 7a, so that the confirmed notice character 236 is displayed. Shows the scene where the battle reach 237 in which the ally character G appears is started. In the center of the display screen 7a, the ally character G238 and the enemy character 239 face each other, and on the upper part of the display screen 7a, three patterns indicating that the jackpot reliability is relatively high are displayed. After that, the ally character G battle production 237 (battle reach G, character production) starts, and if the ally character G wins the enemy character, it becomes a big hit, and if it cannot win (if it is defeated), it becomes a loss.

The execution mode of the advance reach notice effect 232 described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 81 is an example of the execution mode of the advance reach notice effect 232, and has other execution modes. For example, as the stage of the advance reach notice effect 232, a three-stage execution mode (a mode for specifying one ally character display unit from three ally character display units) is shown, but a two-stage execution mode (two). It has a mode of specifying one ally character display unit from the ally character display unit) and a four-stage execution mode (a mode of specifying one ally character display unit from four ally character display units). May be good. Further, in the first stage effect, three or more ally character display units may be displayed, and a plurality of ally character display units may be reduced at once. Further, as the options (friend character display unit) in the advance reach notice effect 232, the mode of developing into the same reach (different characters of the battle reach) has been described, but there may be options to develop into different reach. In addition, there may be a mode in which the development to a specific reach is not notified by reducing all the options.

As described above, the advance reach notice effect 232 (advance notification effect) is applied to the specific information when the specific information is acquired (memorized) based on the entry into the starting port (based on the establishment of a predetermined condition). This is an effect that suggests the contents of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) (the effect to be executed, the reliability of the jackpot, the result of the hit / fail judgment, etc.) by prior notice. In addition, the advance reach notice effect 232 is executed over a plurality of continuous variable displays, and in order to specify the game effect to be executed step by step, the player's expectation for a big hit is gradually increased. It is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the number and types of the advance notice effect species to be determined are maintained. , Only the number of notice effects belonging to the notice effect type is reduced. Therefore, the above-mentioned advance reach notice effect 232 can be executed in any of the low load state and the high load state, but the number of execution modes differs depending on the state. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced.

Specifically, in the low load state, all the patterns of the above-mentioned advance reach notice effect 232 may be executed, and in the high load state, some patterns of the above-mentioned advance reach notice effect 232 may be executed. For example, in the low load state, as the execution mode of the advance reach notice effect 232, it is possible to display all the execution modes of the two-stage execution mode, the three-stage execution mode, and the four-stage execution mode.

On the other hand, in the high load state, as the execution mode of the advance reach notice effect 232, only three stages of execution modes can be executed (selection target). That is, in a high load state, it has an execution mode that cannot be executed (not selected). As a result, it is possible to reduce the control processing load of the advance reach notice effect 232 and display a highly reliable notice image, reduce the control load in a high load state, and prevent the deterioration of the game interest as much as possible. It becomes possible. Further, in the above-described execution mode, more execution modes may be executed in the low load state than in the high load state.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the advance reach notice effect 232 is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the low load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the low load state, and cannot be executed in the high load state. As a notice effect, it may be a notice effect that cannot be determined at the notice determination table for a high load state. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, diversify the execution mode of the advance notice effect, and optimize the control process applied to the game effect control unit. Become.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the advance reach notice effect 232 is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the high load state, and cannot be executed in the low load state. As a notice effect, it may be a notice effect that cannot be determined at the notice determination table for a low load state. Even in such an aspect, the advance notice effect to be determined is changed according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, the execution mode of the advance notice effect is diversified, and the control process applied to the game effect control unit is optimized. It becomes possible.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 9 will be described. In the ninth embodiment, the game effects (first advance notice effect 241 and second advance notice effect 242, second) in which the advance notice effect (conversation notice, step-up notice, etc.) and the execution mode (effect mode, display mode) described in the first embodiment are different. 3 The notice effect 243, the first privilege notification effect 244, the second privilege notification effect 245, the third privilege notification effect 249, etc.) will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the game effect shown in the ninth embodiment can be a game effect (notice effect) to be determined (executable) in both the low load state and the high load state. As a result, it is possible to reduce only the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type while maintaining the number and types of game effect types (notice effect type) as much as possible (without reducing as much as possible).

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the movable decorative member 14 is operated in a predetermined operation mode by using a driving means such as a motor as a notice effect 242 (second notice effect, movable object operation effect, second advance). It has a notice production). In FIG. 82 (a), the movable decorative member 14 is located on the back surface side (upper part of the display screen 7a) of the decorative member 13 provided on the center decorative body 10, and the player can perform movable decoration from the front of the pachinko gaming machine. It shows a scene in which the entire member 14 cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to see. The standby position of the movable decorative member 14 shown in FIG. 82 (a) is set to the standby position (first position) when the movable decorative member 14 is not operating during the game.

FIG. 82B shows a scene in which the movable object operation notice 242 is executed based on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the movable decorative member 14 falls downward from the back surface side of the decorative member 13. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), when the movable decorative member 14 moves to a drop position (second position) substantially in front of the central portion of the display screen 7a, it covers a part of the display area of the display screen 7a. Become. As a result, the visibility of the movable decorative member 14 is improved, while the visibility of the display screen 7a is lowered. Further, a position detection sensor 14b for detecting the position of the movable decorative member 14 is provided, and the position of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the detection information of the position detection sensor 14b and the drive control of the driving means. The movable decorative member 14 that has moved to the drop position (second position) maintains the fall state for a predetermined time, and rises after the predetermined time elapses to be in the state shown in FIG. 82 (a).

Next, the advance notice production and the like of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 88. In the aspect of the ninth embodiment, different winning games (big hit game, small hit game) are supported depending on the combination (type, number, number of executions) of the advance notice effect to be executed and the result of the advance notice effect (whether or not the purpose is achieved). Execute the privilege notification effect (special game notification effect). As a result, when the jackpot game is executed, before the result of the jackpot is shown (before the hit effect symbol is stopped and displayed), the combination and contents of the advance notice effects executed so far can be grasped. It is possible to grasp and guess the type of jackpot game to be executed after that. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the advance notice effect, increase the player's attention to the advance notice effect, and enhance the interest of the game.

FIG. 83A shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of "○") are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. ing. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e in the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may show the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 83 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 83 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 83 (a). As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the same effect symbol (“7”), and the middle effect symbol 8C is variablely displayed. A scene in which a reach mode in which "7" is set as the reach symbol 217 is displayed is shown. The game effect in which the effect symbol 8 is used as the reach effect is also called a reach effect, and by performing a predetermined effect using the effect symbol or the character, the result of the variable display of the effect symbol being executed (the result of the special symbol pass / fail judgment). Is a big hit (stopped and displayed at "777"), with an effect that suggests before the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is shown (the variable display ends or the effect symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed). be. This reach mode (“7 ↓ 7”) and reach effect are also referred to as first notice effect 241 (first advance notice effect).

FIG. 83 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 83 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 83 (b). In FIG. 83 (c), after the effect symbol 8 is in the reach mode, the reach symbol 217 is displayed smaller than before on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a, and the ally character 218 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The scene where the battle production (battle reach, character production) in which the enemy character 219 fights is executed is shown. This battle production (reach production) is also referred to as the first notice production 241. Also, in the battle production (battle reach), when the ally character 218 and the enemy character 219 battle, and the ally character 218 wins, it becomes a big hit (the big hit game is executed), and when the enemy character 219 wins (the ally character). If 218 cannot win and is defeated), it will be missed. In this way, if a predetermined character is displayed and the character succeeds in achieving a predetermined predetermined purpose (winning in a battle), a big hit (the result of variable display of identification information is a specific result). If you fail to achieve the predetermined purpose (defeat / non-win in battle), you will be out of the game. In addition, such a game production is also referred to as a "character production".

FIG. 84 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 83 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 83 (c). FIG. 84 (d) shows a scene in which the ally character 218 has won the enemy character 219 (successfully achieved a predetermined purpose) in the battle effect 216 (first notice effect 241) described above. As a result, it is confirmed that the jackpot is achieved (the jackpot game is executed) (notified and suggested to the player). FIG. 84 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 84 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 84 (d). In FIG. 84 (e), based on the victory in the battle effect 216 described above, the final stop symbol (effect symbol 8C) in the reach effect is stopped and displayed with the same “7” symbol as the reach symbol, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed. The scene where the fixed stop is displayed in "777 (hit mode)" is shown. In addition, the characters "super jackpot" are displayed on the upper part of the display screen 7a to notify that the jackpot is relatively advantageous for the player (15R first jackpot or 15R 4 jackpot). Such a notification effect is also referred to as a first privilege notification effect 244 (first special game notification effect). The privilege notification effect (special game notification effect) is an effect that notifies that the big hit game (special game) is executed when the result of the variation display of the effect symbol (identification information) is a big hit (specific result). be.

FIG. 84 (f) shows a scene in which a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 84 (e), and a jackpot game starts based on the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed in FIG. 84 (e). Specifically, the execution scene of the fanfare production (display production of "Congratulations on the super jackpot!") At the start of the jackpot game is shown. By this fanfare production, the player recognizes that a relatively advantageous jackpot game is started, and enhances the interest of the game. In addition, this fanfare production also corresponds to the first privilege notification production 244 (first special game notification production). As described above, when the first notice effect 241 is executed, the effect that achieves the purpose is executed in the purpose achievement effect (effect that indicates whether or not the purpose is achieved) executed by the first notice effect 241. If so, the first privilege notification effect 244 that notifies that the relatively advantageous jackpot game is executed is executed. In addition, when the effect of achieving the purpose is executed in the purpose achievement effect (effect indicating whether or not the purpose is achieved) executed in the first notice effect 241, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is incorrect. Therefore, the first privilege notification effect 244 is not executed. In addition, when the effect of achieving the purpose is executed in the purpose achievement effect (effect indicating whether or not the purpose is achieved) executed in the first notice effect 241, a relatively advantageous jackpot game is executed. It may be confirmed that (a big hit game such as a 2R third big hit is not executed).

FIG. 85 (g) shows a scene in which a jackpot game executed based on the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed in FIG. 84 (e) is being executed in a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 84 (f). .. On the display screen 7a, the jackpot game effect 247 is displayed, and the predetermined character (winning ally character), the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game (30), and the running round display (during 15 rounds) are displayed. (It is the first round) and a hit symbol suggestion symbol 246 (a symbol indicating "7") indicating a symbol that has become a big hit are displayed.

FIG. 85 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 83 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 83 (c). FIG. 85 (h) shows a scene in which the ally character 218 is defeated by the enemy character 219 (failed to achieve a predetermined purpose) in the battle effect 216 (first notice effect 241) described above. As a result, the player is notified and suggested that the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is incorrect (the jackpot game is not executed). In addition, in the battle effect 216 (first notice effect 241), when the effect that the ally character 218 is defeated by the enemy character 219 (failed to achieve the predetermined purpose) is executed, the first privilege notification effect 244 is performed. Not executed.

FIG. 85 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 85 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 85 (h). In FIG. 85 (i), based on the defeat in the battle effect 216 described above, the final stop symbol (effect symbol 8C) in the reach effect is stopped and displayed with a “6” symbol different from the reach symbol, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed. The scene where the fixed stop is displayed in "767 (disengagement mode)" is shown.

FIG. 86 (j) shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. FIG. 86 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 86 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 86 (j). FIG. 86 (j) shows a scene in which the above-mentioned movable decorative member 14 has fallen (moved) to a drop position (second position) substantially in front of the central portion of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the effect symbol. Shown. This is a movable object operation notice 242 (second notice effect, movable object action effect, second advance notice effect) that notifies the player of the jackpot reliability (possibility of the jackpot game) by operating the movable decorative member 14. ). Since the jackpot reliability of the movable object motion notice 242 is set to be relatively high, when the movable object motion notice 242 for moving the movable decorative member 14 to the second position in front of the display screen is executed, the player goes to the jackpot. Raise the expectation of the game and enhance the interest of the game. Further, the movable decorative member 14 returns to the original position (first position) after a lapse of a predetermined time.

Further, FIG. 86 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 86 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 86 (k). FIG. 86 (l) shows a scene in which the conversation story effect 243 (third notice effect, third advance notice effect) that can be executed following the above-mentioned movable object operation notice 242 is executed. The conversation story effect 243 is an effect in which the character A251 and the character B252 have a predetermined conversation, and when the conversation story effect 243 is executed following the movable object operation notice 242, a specific jackpot is executed thereafter. .. That is, when the conversation story effect 243 (third notice effect) is executed following the movable object operation notice 242 (second notice effect), a specific jackpot is always obtained (a specific jackpot game is executed). In addition, when the conversation story effect 243 (third notice effect) is executed following the movable object operation notice 242 (second notice effect), the second privilege notification effect 245 (second notice effect) that notifies the execution of a specific jackpot is always made. 2 Special game notification effect) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 86 (l), the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a smaller size on the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. In the conversation story production 243 executed in the center of the display screen 7a, the character A251 asks the character B252 "What is the current situation?", And then the character B252 "I don't understand. I will answer. " It should be noted that a plurality of conversation execution patterns (not shown) may be provided. Further, FIG. 87 (m) shows a scene in which the variation display that was being executed in FIG. 86 (l) is completed, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed as a fixed stop display in a specific mode (“135”). In the central part of the display screen 7a, the conversation story effect 243 (third notice effect) is continuously executed. In the conversation story production 243, when the character A251 instructs the character B252 to "investigate in more detail !!", the character B252 subsequently answers "I understand." As described above, the conversation story effect 243 is an effect in which predetermined characters (characters A and B) execute a predetermined effect mode (predetermined conversation). In addition, unlike other jackpots, a specific jackpot (2R third jackpot) does not stop and display three effect symbols with the same symbol, but at least one of the three effect symbols is different from the others. Stop display with.

FIG. 87 (n) is an effect executed following FIG. 87 (m) after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 87 (m). This is the second privilege notification effect 245 (second special game notification effect) indicating that a specific jackpot (2R third jackpot) is executed, and the characters "special bonus generation" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. FIG. 87 (o) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 87 (n), during execution of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot symbol (“135”) stopped and displayed in FIG. 87 (m). Shows the scene. On the display screen 7a, the jackpot game effect 247 in a specific jackpot game is displayed, and a predetermined character, a running round display (which is the first round of the two rounds), and a symbol that has become a jackpot are displayed. The hit symbol suggestion symbol 246 (the symbol indicating "★") is displayed.

It should be noted that the first privilege notification effect and the second privilege notification effect are different types (at least one of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, the number of rounds, the game state set after the end of the big hit game, etc. is different). It is a production to notify. In this embodiment, the first privilege notification effect notifies the occurrence of a big hit in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is larger than that of the second privilege notification effect. Further, instead of such an aspect, the second privilege notification effect may notify the occurrence of a big hit in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the big hit game is larger than that of the first privilege notification effect. In addition, the second privilege notification effect may be a 2R third big hit or a big hit with a very small number of prize balls that can be obtained (it is difficult to obtain a prize ball), or after the big hit game is completed. It may be a production corresponding to a big hit in which the game state of the game is always high, or it may be a production corresponding to a big hit in which the game state after the big hit game is a high accuracy low base state, or a game after the big hit game is completed. It may be a production corresponding to a big hit in which the state becomes a highly accurate and high base state.

In addition, the high-accuracy low-base state may be a gaming state in which small hits can occur more frequently (a prize ball can be easily obtained by a small hit than in other gaming states). Further, in addition to the first privilege notification effect and the second privilege notification effect, a third privilege notification effect and a fourth privilege notification effect may be provided. In this case, the third privilege notification effect has at least one of different types (the number of prize balls that can be obtained, the number of rounds, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, etc.) from the first privilege notification effect and the second privilege notification effect. It is a production that notifies the execution of the jackpot (different). In addition, the fourth privilege notification effect is different from the first privilege notification effect, the second privilege notification effect, and the third privilege notification effect (the number of prize balls that can be obtained, the number of rounds, and the game state set after the jackpot game is completed. Etc.) is a production that notifies the execution of a big hit.

In this way, when the conversation story production 243 (third notice production) is executed following the movable object operation notice 242 (second notice production), the second privilege notification that notifies the execution of a specific jackpot is always made. The effect 245 (second special game notification effect) is executed, and a specific jackpot game is executed. Further, as described above, when the first notice effect 241 (reach mode or battle effect) is executed, the purpose achievement effect (effect indicating whether or not the purpose is achieved) executed in the first notice effect 241 is executed. Then, when the effect of achieving the purpose is executed, the first privilege notification effect 244 for notifying that the relatively advantageous jackpot game is executed is executed.

As a result, a specific advance notice effect (type) is executed as the advance notice effect (advance notice effect), and a specific privilege notification effect (first privilege notification effect) is executed according to the effect content indicated by the advance notice effect. In addition, when a specific combination (type, number) of advance notice effects is executed as a notice effect (advance notice effect) (regardless of the effect content of the advance notice effect), a specific privilege notification effect (first privilege notification effect) A different privilege notification effect (second privilege notification effect) is executed. With such a configuration, the player is made to pay attention to the type, combination, number, and contents of the advance notice effect to be executed, and any privilege notification effect (which big hit game) is performed during the execution of the advance notice effect. It is possible to make a guess as to whether or not it will be executed and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as the execution mode of the game effect including the execution of the movable object operation notice 242 described above, the execution mode is different from that described above. That is, in the above description, the execution mode in which the conversation story effect 243 is executed following the movable object operation notice 242 is shown, but in this embodiment, other game effects (reach effect, story effect, etc.) are performed following the movable object operation notice 242. ) Is executed. Specifically, FIG. 88 (p) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 86 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 86 (k). FIG. 88 (p) is a scene after the movable object operation notice 242 is executed and the movable decorative member 14 returns to the original position (first position). On the display screen 7a, the effect symbol 8 is in the reach mode (“5 ↓ 5”), and a predetermined character is displayed in the central portion to execute the fishing reach 248 (fishing effect). In fishing reach 248, if the player succeeds in catching a predetermined fish (successfully achieves the purpose), it becomes a big hit, and if it fails to catch the fish (successfully achieves the purpose), it misses. It becomes.

FIG. 88 (q) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 86 (p) in the same variation display as in FIG. 88 (p). FIG. 88 (q) shows a scene in which the player succeeds in catching a predetermined fish in the fishing reach 248. From this, the player recognizes that the jackpot is reached (“555”) and the predetermined jackpot game is executed. FIG. 88 (r) shows a scene in which the result of the variation display in FIG. 88 (q) is a big hit and the big hit symbol (“555”) is fixedly stopped and displayed. The jackpot effect symbol "555" is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the characters "big hit", which is the third privilege notification effect 249 (third special game notification effect), are displayed above it. In the display of "big hit" which is the third privilege notification effect 249, it is assumed that the execution of the 15R second big hit is notified.

Although not shown, if the fishing reach 248 fails to catch a predetermined fish in FIG. 88 (p), the disengagement effect symbol (for example, "545") is displayed as a definite stop, and the disengagement is indicated. Become. Further, in the case where the fishing reach 248 is a big hit, there may be a case where the first privilege notification effect 244 is executed and a case where the third privilege notification effect 249 is executed. Further, there may be a case where the second privilege notification effect 245 is executed.

As described above, when the movable decorative member 14 is operated (the movable object motion effect 242 is executed), there are a case where the conversation story effect 243 is executed and a case where the fishing reach 248 is executed after that. There is. Further, another game effect (reach effect) may be executed. Then, when the conversation story effect 243 is executed after the movable object motion effect 242, the big hit is confirmed at that time, and the execution of the second privilege notification effect 245 is confirmed. Then, a specific jackpot game is executed. As a result, the player can grasp the jackpot and the like to be executed at an early stage, and can play the game with a sense of security.

On the other hand, when the movable decorative member 14 is operated (the movable object motion effect 242 is executed), and then the fishing effect 248 is executed, the jackpot is not determined at that time, and the fishing effect 248 The result depends on the content (whether or not the purpose is achieved) (big hit or miss). Further, even in the case of a big hit, there are a plurality of types of big hits that can be executed, and the player can maintain the game interest for a long period of time. Further, when the battle effect 216 is executed and the ally character wins the enemy character (when the purpose is achieved), the big hit is confirmed at that time, and the execution of the first privilege notification effect 244 is confirmed. Then, a relatively advantageous 15R first big hit game is executed.

As described above, the timing of notifying the player of the jackpot differs depending on what kind of advance notice effect is executed and in what combination, and the type of jackpot notified to the player also differs. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the game production (notice production, etc.) and enhance the game interest of the player.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the number and types of the advance notice effect species to be determined are maintained. , Only the number of notice effects belonging to the notice effect type is reduced. Therefore, the above-mentioned game effects (first notice effect 241, second notice effect 242, third notice effect 243, first privilege notification effect 244, second privilege notification effect 245, third privilege notification effect 249, etc.) are low. It can be executed in both the load state and the high load state, but the number of execution modes differs depending on the state. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced.

Specifically, in the low load state, the above-mentioned game effects (first notice effect 241, second notice effect 242, third notice effect 243, first privilege notification effect 244, second privilege notification effect 245, third privilege notification) All patterns of the effect 249, etc.) can be executed, and in a high load state, the above-mentioned game effects (first notice effect 241, second notice effect 242, third notice effect 243, first privilege notification effect 244, second A part of the pattern of the privilege notification effect 245, the third privilege notification effect 249, etc.) may be made executable. For example, in a high load state, it has an execution mode that cannot be executed (not selected). As a result, it is possible to reduce the control processing load of the game production and prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment. Further, in the above-described execution mode, more execution modes may be executed in the low load state than in the high load state.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the game effect is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the low load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the low load state, and as a notice effect that cannot be executed in the high load state. It may be a notice effect that cannot be decided by the notice decision table for a high load state. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, diversify the execution mode of the advance notice effect, and optimize the control process applied to the game effect control unit. Become.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the game effect is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the high load state, and as a notice effect that cannot be executed in the low load state. It may be a notice effect that cannot be decided by the notice decision table for the low load state. Even in such an aspect, the advance notice effect to be determined is changed according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, the execution mode of the advance notice effect is diversified, and the control process applied to the game effect control unit is optimized. It becomes possible.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 10 will be described. In the tenth embodiment, a game effect (pseudo-variation notice effect 264) in which the advance notice effect (conversation notice, step-up notice, etc.) and the execution mode (effect mode, display mode) described in the first embodiment are different will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the game effect shown in the tenth embodiment can be a game effect (notice effect) to be determined (executable) in both the low load state and the high load state. As a result, it is possible to reduce only the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type while maintaining the number and types of game effect types (notice effect type) as much as possible (without reducing as much as possible).

Further, the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 of the tenth embodiment is a game effect that is executed in accordance with the variation display of the effect symbol and is executed at a predetermined timing during the variation display of the effect symbol. Further, the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 displays the modified symbol 261 during the execution of the effect, and the display form of the modified symbol is described later in the first form 261a (first display form) and the second form 261b (second display form). By changing (transforming) to the display form) or the third form 261c (third display form), the game effect is diversified. Further, depending on the display form indicated by the deformed symbol 261, by shifting to the reach effect or re-variating the effect symbol a predetermined number of times (multiple times), a pseudo-variation display is performed a plurality of times during one variation display. It is said to be a fluctuating production. This pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is also referred to as "multiple change notice", "form change notice", or "form change effect". Further, the deformed symbol 261 displayed in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is also referred to as a "rotational deformed symbol", a "change symbol", or a "specific change symbol".

FIG. 89 shows a display form of the modified symbol 261 displayed (appearing) in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 described above. FIG. 89A shows the first form 261a (first display form) of the modified symbol 261 and is displayed as a symbol (pattern, character) imitating a triangular figure. This is a view of the modified symbol 261 viewed from the front. Further, 89 (b) shows a form (state) in which the modified symbol 261 of the first form shown in FIG. 89 (a) is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle about the vertical direction of the paper surface. FIG. 89 (c) shows the second form 261b (second display form) of the modified symbol 261. The modified symbol 261 shown in FIG. 89 (b) is coaxially defined (the axis in the vertical direction of the paper surface). It is rotated clockwise by an angle (rotated 90 degrees clockwise from FIG. 89A). This is a view of the modified symbol 261 viewed from the side surface, and is displayed as a symbol (picture, character) imitating a specific effect symbol (“3”).

In the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, the above-mentioned deformed symbol 261 is rotated and displayed (variable display, change), and the deformed symbol 261 becomes a symbol having a different appearance (different display mode) depending on the display form when the modified symbol 261 is stopped. Although not shown in FIG. 89, by rotating and displaying (changing) the modified symbol 261, other display modes can be obtained. For example, the modified symbol 261 of the first form shown in FIG. 89 (a) is rotated 90 degrees to the left with respect to the vertical direction of the paper surface, so that the symbol of FIG. 89 (c) is inverted left and right (Epsilon, E). It becomes.

Next, the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 (morphological change effect) of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. The pseudo-variation notice effect 264 of the tenth embodiment is a notice effect indicating the feasibility (big hit reliability) of the big hit game depending on the execution mode. For example, in the pseudo-variation notice effect, when there is no re-variation, the jackpot reliability of 3% is shown, when the re-variation is once, the jackpot reliability of 5% is shown, and when the re-variation is twice, the jackpot reliability is shown. Shows a jackpot reliability of 10%, and shows a jackpot reliability of 20% when the revariation is 3 times. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the advance notice effect, increase the degree of attention of the player to the advance notice effect (changed form of the deformed pattern), and enhance the interest of the game.

FIG. 90A shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of "○") are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. ing. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e in the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may show the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 90 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 90 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 90 (a). FIG. 90B shows a scene in which the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 (form change effect) using the modified symbol 261 is executed on the display screen 7a. "3" is stopped as the left effect symbol 8L, and the modified symbol 261 is displayed as the right effect symbol 8R (at the display position of the right effect symbol). It should be noted that the middle effect symbol 8C continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the deformed symbol 261 displayed at the position of the right effect symbol is executing the rotation display (change display) in a predetermined direction, and the form is being changed (the form is not fixed).

FIG. 90 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 90 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 90 (b). In FIG. 90 (c), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the deformed symbol 261 that was being displayed in the variation (during the form change) is displayed in the first form 261a, which is a symbol imitating a triangle. Shows the scene. At this point, the middle production symbol is still being displayed in a variable manner (“3 ↓ △”). FIG. 90 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 90 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 90 (c). In FIG. 90 (d), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the middle effect diagram is stopped and displayed at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the same “3” as the left effect symbol). A scene in which all of the production symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) is shown (“33 △”). As a result, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in a stop mode including the modified symbol 261 of the first form 261a. In this execution mode, the middle effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing after the modified symbol 261 stops and displays in the first form, but the timing is not limited to such timing, and the middle effect symbol and the modified symbol are displayed at the same timing. It may be stopped and displayed with, or the middle effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a timing earlier than the deformed symbol.

In the execution mode of the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, when the modified symbol 261 is changed and displayed to become the first form 261a, the effect symbol is changed and displayed again, and the modified symbol 261 is changed and displayed to be the second form 261b. When the reach mode is configured, the reach effect is executed. In FIG. 90 (d), since the deformed symbol 261 is displayed in the first form 261a, the effect symbol (including the deformed symbol) temporarily stopped and displayed is re-variably displayed (re-variated display). It is assumed that the higher the number of times of this re-variation display is, the higher the reliability of the jackpot shown to the player is higher than the case where the number of times of the re-variation display is small.

FIG. 90 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 90 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 90 (d). FIG. 90 (e) shows a scene in which the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed and all three effect symbols are re-variably displayed. This is a game effect (pseudo-variation notice effect) in which the first variation display is being executed, but the second variation display appears to be executed in a pseudo manner. In FIG. 90 (f), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed at "3", and the deformed symbol is again displayed as the right effect symbol (at the display position of the right effect symbol). 261 is displayed (change display). FIG. 91 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 90 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 90 (f). In FIG. 90 (g), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the deformed symbol 261 that was being displayed in the variation (during the form change) is displayed in the first form 261a, which is a symbol imitating a triangle. ("3 ↓ △").

FIG. 91 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 91 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 91 (g). In FIG. 91 (h), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the middle effect diagram is stopped and displayed at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the same “3” as the left effect symbol). A scene in which all of the production symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) is shown (“33 △”). As a result, the effect symbol is again displayed as a stop display (temporary stop display) in a stop mode including the modified symbol 261 of the first form 261a, and the revariation display (continuation of the pseudo variation notice effect) is confirmed.

FIG. 91 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 91 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 91 (h). FIG. 91 (i) shows a scene in which the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed and all three effect symbols are re-variably displayed. This is a game effect (pseudo-variation notice effect) in which the first variation display is being executed, but the third variation display appears to be executed in a pseudo manner. That is, it is a scene in which the second re-variation display is executed. FIG. 91 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 91 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 91 (i). In FIG. 91 (j), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, the left effect symbol is stopped and displayed at "3" (specific effect symbol), and the right effect symbol is displayed as the right effect symbol (display of the right effect symbol). (At the position), the modified symbol 261 is displayed (change display) again.

FIG. 91 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 91 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 91 (j). FIG. 91 (k) is a symbol in which the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the deformed symbol 261 that was displaying the variation (during the form change) imitates the specific effect symbol “3”. The scene displayed in the second form 261b is shown (“3 ↓ 3”). As a result, it is confirmed that the effect symbol and the modified symbol are in the reach mode, and then the reach effect is executed. Further, since the effect symbol and the modified symbol are in the reach mode, the variation display in the pseudo variation notice effect 264 may not be performed again. The game effect in which the effect symbol 8 (which may include a deformed symbol corresponding to a specific effect symbol) is performed as a reach mode is also called a reach effect, and is executed by performing a predetermined effect using the effect symbol or the character. The result of the variation display of the effect symbol inside (the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment) may be a big hit (stop display at "777"), and the result of the variation display of the effect symbol is shown (the variation display ends). This is an effect that is suggested before the effect is displayed (or the effect symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed).

FIG. 91 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 91 (k) in the same variation display as in FIG. 91 (k). FIG. 91 (l) shows a scene in which the reach effect is executed by the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, and the battle reach 216 is executed as the reach effect after the pseudo-variation notice effect 264. In the above-mentioned pseudo-variation notice effect 264, an example of an effect of an execution mode in which the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is used to perform pseudo-variation display three times in one variation display is illustrated. Not limited to such an aspect, the second form is displayed in the change display of the first modified symbol 261 to perform the reach effect, that is, the execution mode in which the re-variation display is not performed in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 and the re-variation display. Is performed once (pseudo-variation display is performed twice) to shift to the reach mode, and re-variation display is performed three times (pseudo-variation display is performed four times) to reach the reach mode. It has an execution mode that shifts to. Further, in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, it is assumed that the larger the number of re-variation displays (the number of pseudo-variation displays), the higher the reliability of the jackpot shown to the player than the smaller the number.

Further, in the above-described execution mode, after the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is executed, the stop mode of the effect symbol including the modified symbol 261 becomes the reach mode, and the mode shifts to the reach effect. Not limited to such a mode, it may have an execution mode that does not shift to the reach mode after the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is executed. Specifically, FIG. 92 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 90 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 90 (b). In FIG. 92 (m), the change display of the modified symbol 261 shown in FIG. 90 (b) continues.

FIG. 92 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 92 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 92 (m). In FIG. 92 (n), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the middle effect diagram is stopped and displayed at a predetermined symbol (“4” different from the left effect symbol in this embodiment). A scene in which all of the production symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) is shown (“34E”). In the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, the modified symbol 261 is displayed in the third form 261c, not in the first form 261a or the second form 261b, and in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, all (three) effect symbols are displayed. It was stopped and displayed with a different pattern. As a result, it is shown to the player that the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 does not continue any more and does not shift to the reach effect, and the result of the variation display is out of alignment and the fixed stop display is displayed.

FIG. 92 (p) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 92 (o) in the same variation display as in FIG. 92 (o). FIG. 92 (o) shows a scene in which the modified symbol 261 is changed to an effect symbol used in the normal variable display, and the fixed stop display is performed in the detached mode (“348”). In this execution mode, an example will be described in which the modified symbol 261 is stopped and displayed in the third form without performing the re-variation display even once in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, and the effect symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed in the off mode. did. Not limited to such an execution mode, the deformed symbol 261 is stopped and displayed in the third form after the re-variation display is performed once or twice or more in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, and the effect symbol is confirmed in the detached mode. It may be stopped and displayed. Further, when the re-variation display is performed twice or more in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, the deformed symbol does not become the third form, but always becomes the second form (the reach mode), and the process shifts to the reach effect. It may be a thing.

As a result, even though the pseudo-variation notice production has been re-variated many times to produce a highly anticipated production, it does not shift to the reach production and prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the game entertainment is extremely reduced. It becomes possible.

In the above-described execution mode, only one modified symbol 261 is included in the (three) effect symbols constituting the stop mode, and the effect mode is different depending on the display form of the modified symbol 261 (revariable display, reach effect). The pseudo-variation notice effect 264 has been described. Not limited to such a mode, a plurality of modified symbols 261 may be arranged on the (three) effect symbols constituting the stop mode. Specifically, an embodiment using a plurality of modified symbols 261 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94.

FIG. 93A shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. FIG. 93 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 93 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 93 (a). FIG. 93B shows a scene in which the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 (form change effect) using the modified symbol 261 is executed on the display screen 7a. The modified symbol 261 is displayed as the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R (at the display position of the left effect symbol and the display position of the right effect symbol). It should be noted that the middle effect symbol 8C continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the deformed symbol 261 displayed at the position of the right effect symbol is executing the rotation display (change display) in a predetermined direction, and the form is being changed (the form is not fixed).

FIG. 93 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 93 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 93 (c) shows the first form 261a in which the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the left and right deformed symbols 261 that were displaying the variation (during the form change) are symbols that imitate a triangle. It shows the displayed (form confirmed) scene. At this point, the middle production symbol is still being displayed in a variable manner (“△ ↓ △”). FIG. 93 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 93 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 93 (c). In FIG. 93 (d), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the middle effect diagram is stopped and displayed with a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the special symbol “re” indicating re-variation). A scene in which all three production symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) is shown (“△ re △”). As a result, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in a stop mode including the modified symbol 261 of the first form 261a (first display form) on the left and right. In this execution mode, the middle effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing after the modified symbol 261 stops and displays in the first form, but the timing is not limited to such timing, and the middle effect symbol and the modified symbol are displayed at the same timing. It may be stopped and displayed with, or the middle effect symbol may be stopped and displayed at a timing earlier than the deformed symbol.

FIG. 93 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 93 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 93 (d). FIG. 93 (e) shows a scene in which the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed and all three effect symbols are re-variably displayed. This is a game effect (pseudo-variation notice effect) in which the first variation display is being executed, but the second variation display appears to be executed in a pseudo manner. That is, it is a scene in which the second re-variation display is executed. FIG. 93 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 93 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 93 (e). In FIG. 93 (f), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the modified symbol 261 is displayed again as the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol (at the display positions of the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol). (Change display). Further, in FIG. 93 (f), both the left effect symbol and the modified symbol 261 of the right effect symbol are being displayed as changes.

FIG. 94 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 93 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 93 (f). In FIG. 94 (g), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the left and right deformed symbols 261 that were in the variation display (during the form change) are rotated and displayed, and all of them are specific effect symbols. A scene displayed in the second form 261b (second display form), which is a pattern imitating "3", is shown ("3 ↓ 3"). As a result, it is confirmed that the reach mode is formed by the left and right deformed symbols 261 and the reach effect is executed after that. Further, since the modified symbol 261 is in the reach mode, the re-variation display in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 may not be performed any more (the number of re-variation display is fixed at this point).

FIG. 93 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 93 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 93 (g). FIG. 93 (h) shows a scene in which the reach effect is executed by the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, and the battle reach 216 is executed as the reach effect after the pseudo-variation notice effect 264. In addition, although the reach symbol (“3”) is displayed on the upper left and right on the display screen of FIG. 93 (h) as the effect symbol used for the normal variable display, the second form imitating “3”. The modified symbol 261 of 261b may be displayed. Further, in the above-mentioned pseudo-variation notice effect 264, an effect of an execution mode in which the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is used to perform pseudo-variation display twice in one variation display is illustrated. Not limited to such an aspect, the second form is displayed in the change display of the first modified symbol 261 to perform the reach effect, that is, the execution mode in which the re-variation display is not performed in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 and the re-variation display. Is performed twice (pseudo-variation display is performed 3 times) to shift to the reach mode, and re-variation display is performed 3 times (pseudo-variation display is performed 4 times) to reach the reach mode. It has an execution mode that shifts to. Further, in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, it is assumed that the larger the number of re-variation displays (the number of pseudo-variation displays), the higher the reliability of the jackpot shown to the player than the smaller the number.

Further, in the above-described execution mode, after the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is executed, the stop mode of the effect symbol including the modified symbol 261 becomes the reach mode, and the mode shifts to the reach effect. Not limited to such a mode, it may have an execution mode that does not shift to the reach mode after the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is executed. Specifically, FIG. 92 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 90 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 90 (b). In FIG. 92 (m), the change display of the modified symbol 261 shown in FIG. 90 (b) continues.

FIG. 92 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 92 (m) in the same variation display as in FIG. 92 (m). In FIG. 92 (n), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the middle effect diagram is stopped and displayed at a predetermined symbol (“4” different from the left effect symbol in this embodiment). A scene in which all of the production symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) is shown (“34E”). In the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, the modified symbol 261 is displayed in the third form 261c, not in the first form 261a or the second form 261b, and in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, all (three) effect symbols are displayed. It was stopped and displayed with a different pattern. As a result, it is shown to the player that the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 does not continue any more and does not shift to the reach effect, and the result of the variation display is out of alignment and the fixed stop display is displayed.

Further, also in this execution mode, there is a mode in which the mode does not shift to the reach mode after the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is executed. Specifically, FIG. 94 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 93 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 93 (b). In FIG. 94 (i), after the change display of the modified symbol 261 shown in FIG. 90 (b), the modified symbol 261 as the left effect symbol is displayed in the first form 261a, and the modified symbol 261 as the right effect symbol is the first. The scene displayed in 2 form 261b is shown. That is, it shows a scene in which a plurality of (two) deformed symbols 261 are displayed in different display forms. In addition, any of them may be displayed in the third form 261c. In addition, the medium production design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 94 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 92 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 94 (i). In FIG. 94 (j), the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 is continuously executed, and the middle effect diagram is stopped and displayed at a predetermined symbol (“5” different from the left and right effect symbols in this embodiment). A scene in which all three production symbols are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) is shown (“Δ53”). In the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, all (three) effect symbols were stopped and displayed with different symbols. As a result, it is shown to the player that the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 does not continue any more and does not shift to the reach effect, and the result of the variation display is out of alignment and the fixed stop display is displayed.

FIG. 94 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 94 (j) in the same variation display as in FIG. 94 (j). FIG. 94 (k) shows a scene in which the modified symbol 261 is changed to an effect symbol used in the normal variable display, and the fixed stop display is performed in the detached mode (“153”). In this execution mode, the plurality of deformed symbols 261 are stopped and displayed in different display modes without performing the re-variation display even once in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, and the effect symbols are fixedly stopped and displayed in the off mode. An example was explained. Not limited to such an execution mode, the deformed symbol 261 is stopped and displayed in the third form after the re-variation display is performed once or twice or more in the pseudo-variation notice effect 264, and the effect symbol is confirmed in the detached mode. It may be stopped and displayed. Further, as described above, when the pseudo-variation notice effect 264 performs the re-variation display twice or more, the plurality of deformed symbols may always be in the reach mode, and the process may shift to the reach effect.

As a result, even though the pseudo-variation notice production has been re-variated many times to produce a highly anticipated production, it does not shift to the reach production and prevents the occurrence of a situation in which the game entertainment is extremely reduced. It becomes possible.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the number and types of the advance notice effect species to be determined are maintained. , Only the number of notice effects belonging to the notice effect type is reduced. Therefore, the above-mentioned game effect (pseudo-variation notice effect) can be executed in any of the low load state and the high load state, but the number of execution modes differs depending on the state. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced.

Specifically, in the low load state, all the patterns of the above-mentioned game effect (pseudo-variation notice effect) can be executed, and in the high load state, some patterns of the above-mentioned game effect (pseudo-variation notice effect) are executed. It may be possible. For example, in a high load state, it has an execution mode that cannot be executed (not selected). As a result, it is possible to reduce the control processing load of the game production and prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment. Further, in the above-described execution mode, more execution modes may be executed in the low load state than in the high load state.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the game effect is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the low load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the low load state, and as a notice effect that cannot be executed in the high load state. It may be a notice effect that cannot be decided by the notice decision table for a high load state. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, diversify the execution mode of the advance notice effect, and optimize the control process applied to the game effect control unit. Become.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the game effect is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the high load state, and as a notice effect that cannot be executed in the low load state. It may be a notice effect that cannot be decided by the notice decision table for the low load state. Even in such an aspect, the advance notice effect to be determined is changed according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, the execution mode of the advance notice effect is diversified, and the control process applied to the game effect control unit is optimized. It becomes possible.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine of Example 11 will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, a game effect (image display advance notice effect 273) in which the advance notice effect (conversation notice, step-up notice, etc.) and the execution mode (effect mode, display mode) described in the first embodiment are different will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the game effect shown in the eleventh embodiment can be a game effect (preliminary effect) to be determined (executable) in both the low load state and the high load state. As a result, it is possible to reduce only the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type while maintaining the number and types of game effect types (notice effect type) as much as possible (without reducing as much as possible).

Further, the image display notice effect 273 of the eleventh embodiment is a game effect that is executed in accordance with the variable display of the effect symbol and is executed at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the effect symbol. Further, the image display notice effect 273 displays the shadow of the circular (predetermined shape) notice image 271 (specific decorative image) during the execution of the effect, and at a plurality of predetermined points (display point, display timing). , This is an effect of gradually (in order) displaying a plurality of image elements constituting the preview image 271. Further, depending on the display mode (change in display mode) of the preview image 271, different reliability as the jackpot reliability may be notified, and then the reach effect or the character effect may be displayed, or the effect symbol may be displayed a predetermined number of times (multiple times). It may fluctuate again (pseudo-variation that displays fluctuations multiple times during one fluctuation display). This image display notice effect 273 is also referred to as "decorative image change effect". Further, the notice image 271 displayed in the image display notice effect 273 is also referred to as a "specific decorative image" or a "cut-in image".

Next, the image display notice effect 273 (decorative image change effect) of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. The image display notice effect 273 of the eleventh embodiment is a notice effect indicating the feasibility (big hit reliability) of the big hit game depending on the execution mode. For example, in the image display notice effect 273, when the first point effect 274 is executed and the special point effect 275 is not executed, the jackpot reliability of 1% to 5% is shown depending on the execution mode, and the first point effect 274 and When the special point effect 275 is executed, the jackpot reliability of 10% to 20% is shown depending on the execution mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the notice effect, increase the player's attention to the notice effect (display form of the notice image), and enhance the game interest.

FIG. 95A shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. As shown in FIG. 95 (a), three first effect hold 9a (pictures of "○") are displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. ing. It is shown that there are three undigested information (information such as a special symbol hit / miss determination random number) that is acquired and stored based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. Further, in the variable pattern display area 9e in the lower center of the display screen 7a, one variable pattern 9f is displayed with a pattern of "〇" which is slightly larger than the first effect hold 9a. In the variable pattern display area 9e, a variable pattern 9f indicating that the variable display is currently being executed is displayed. Then, depending on the display mode of the variable pattern 9f, the result of the variable display currently being executed may show the possibility of becoming a big hit (stop display with the big hit symbol).

FIG. 95 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 95 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 95 (a). In FIG. 95 (b), the notice image 271 (specific decorative image) is displayed on the display screen 7a with a thin broken line (such a state is also referred to as a “non-display state”), and the image display notice effect 273 ( Shows the scene where the decorative image change effect) is executed. In this embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the notice image 271 (specific decorative image) is composed of a plurality of image elements, and the image element is displayed by a dark solid line that is easy to see at a predetermined timing during execution of the image display notice effect 273. (Such a state is called "display state"). The preview image 271 of the present embodiment is composed of five image elements, that is, a circular image element 272 and four rectangular image elements 272 on the inside, top, bottom, left, and right. These image elements 272 are sequentially displayed in the display state at a predetermined timing during execution of the image display notice effect 273.

Further, in the present execution mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the image element 272 in the non-display state of the thin broken line is displayed so that the player can easily grasp the image element 272 in the display state. After that, some or all of the image elements 272 are designated as image elements 272 in a dark solid line display state, and the displayed image elements 272 are shown to the player (see FIGS. 95 (c), (d), etc.). Instead of displaying the image element 272 in the non-display state of the thin broken line, only the image element 272 in the display state may be displayed at the timing when the image element 272 is in the display state. In any case, it suffices for the player to clearly recognize which of the image elements 272 constituting the preview image 271 is the displayed image element 272.

FIG. 95 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 95 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 95 (b). FIG. 95 (c) shows a scene in which the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed and the first point effect 274 is being executed in the image display notice effect 273. The first point effect 274 is the first stage effect in the image display notice effect 273, and the first stage effect has a plurality of image element display timings, and the image element display timing is 5 Of the 272 image elements, any image element 272 is displayed (displayed). In this embodiment, the first stage effect has two timings (display timings), a first timing (first display timing) and a second timing (second display timing). Then, at those display timings, the number and location of image elements determined in advance by the fluctuation pattern are displayed in order. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the larger the number of displayed image elements, the higher the jackpot reliability than the case where the number of displayed image elements is small. Further, it is considered that the jackpot reliability is higher when all (5) image elements are displayed than when only some image elements (1 to 4) are displayed.

FIG. 95 (c) shows an upper horizontally long rectangular image element 272 (one image element) out of the five image elements 272 at the first timing of the first point effect 274 (first image display). Is the displayed mode. In this embodiment, the three effect symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner. FIG. 95 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 95 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 95 (c). In FIG. 95 (d), the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and in the second timing of the first point effect 274 (first image display), in addition to the image element 272 displayed at the first timing. Of the five image elements 272, the lower horizontally long rectangular image element 272 and the left and right vertically long rectangular image elements (three image elements) are displayed. As a result, four image elements are displayed (displayed) at the first timing and the second timing in the first point effect 274. In addition, the state in which the display state is fixed at the first timing and the second timing in the first point effect 274 is maintained for the first specific time (first time), and the player is provided with the notice image 271 in the display state. At the same time, the notice image 271 is set to a state in which it is easy to recognize.

FIG. 95 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 95 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 95 (d). FIG. 95 (e) shows a scene in which the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and after the first point effect 274, the reach effect is executed with the effect symbol 8 as the reach mode (“5 ↓ 5”). Is shown. Further, in FIG. 95 (e), the preview image 271 displayed in the first point effect 274 is moved and displayed in a small size at the lower right (end) of the display screen 7a, and reaches at the center of the display screen 7a. Perform the production. Also at this time, at the first timing and the second timing in the first point effect 274, the state in which the display state is fixed is continuously maintained, and the player is shown the notice image 271 in the display state, and the said The preview image 271 is set to a state in which it is easy to recognize. In order to maintain the first specific time for a relatively long period of time in this way, the special point effect 275 (second image display) described later may be executed (may not be executed) after the first point effect 274. This is because the player is expected to execute the special point effect 275, or the special additional effect 276 (fan effect, special effect) indicating whether or not to execute the special point effect 275 is executed.

FIG. 95 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 95 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 95 (e). In FIG. 95 (f), the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and the image display notice effect 273 is surrounded by the notice image 271 displayed in the first point effect 274 displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. , Add a jagged decorative effect. This decorative effect is a special additional effect 276 that encourages whether or not a special point effect 275 (second image display) occurs after this. If the special additional effect 276 is successful, the special point effect 275 is executed, and if the special additional effect 276 fails, the special point effect 275 is not executed. Also at this time, the preview image 271 continuously maintains the state in which the display state is fixed at the first timing and the second timing in the first point effect 274 (that is, the first specific time is being continued).

FIG. 96 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 95 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 95 (f). In FIG. 95 (e), the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and the notice image 271 to which the decoration effect is added in the special additional effect 276 described above is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. , Shows the scene where the special additional production 276 was successful. As a result, the execution of the special point production 275 is confirmed, and the player enhances the game interest. Also at this time, the preview image 271 continuously maintains the state in which the display state is fixed at the first timing and the second timing in the first point effect 274 (that is, the first specific time is being continued).

FIG. 96 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 96 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 96 (g). FIG. 96 (h) shows that the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and the special point effect 275 (second) is performed at the special timing (special display timing, additional display timing) during the execution of the image display notice effect 273. Shows the scene where the image display) is executed. FIG. 96 (h) displays the remaining image elements 272 (circular image elements) of the preview image 271 that was in the hidden state at the first timing and the predetermined special timings after the second timing (circular image elements). This is the scene (displayed). Then, the display state of the preview image 271 displaying all the five image elements 272 is maintained for the second specific time (second time). At this time, the effect symbol 8 is in the reach mode and the reach effect is being executed.

In this execution mode, the first point effect 274 that displays the image element at least twice, and the special point effect 275 that displays the image element at a special timing after the first point effect, are used for the preview image 271 (specification). All the image elements of the decorative image) are displayed (displayed). Not limited to such an aspect, it may have an execution aspect in which a hidden image element still remains even when a special point effect is performed. For example, the first point effect 274 may display three image elements, the special point effect 275 may display one image element, and only four of the five image elements may be displayed. There may be. Further, regardless of the number of images displayed in the first point effect, when the special point effect is executed, all the image elements (5) of the preview image 271 may be displayed without fail.

FIG. 96 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 96 (h) in the same variation display as in FIG. 96 (h). FIG. 96 (i) is based on the execution of the special point effect 275 (second image display) in FIG. 96 (h), and thereafter, the battle effect 216 (battle effect 216), which is a game effect with relatively high jackpot reliability. Shows the scene where battle reach, character production, and specific game production) are executed. In this embodiment, this battle effect 216 (specific game effect) is not executed when the image display notice effect 273 is executed, the first point effect is executed, and the special point effect is not executed. That is, the battle effect 216 (specific game effect) may be a special effect that is executed when both the first point effect and the special point effect are executed in the image display notice effect (decorative image change effect). can. Further, the battle effect 216 (specific game effect) is set to be executed when all of the notice images 271 (specific decoration images) are displayed, and is not executed when only a part of the notice image 271 is displayed. It may be used as a production.

Therefore, when both the first point effect and the special point effect are executed, the result of the variable display during execution may be a big hit than when the first point effect is executed and the special point effect is not executed. Is high.

FIG. 96 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 95 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 95 (e). In the above-described execution mode, the mode of shifting from FIG. 95 (e) to the special point effect 275 has been described. In this execution mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (e), although the first point effect 274 is executed and the reach effect is executed, the effect symbol 8 is removed without executing the special point effect thereafter. (“535”) indicates a scene in which the confirmation stop is displayed. FIG. 96 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 95 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 95 (d). In this execution mode, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), although the first point effect 274 is executed, the reach effect is not executed after that, and the special point effect is not executed. , The scene in which the effect symbol 8 is displayed as a fixed stop display in the detached mode (“348”) is shown. In this embodiment, when the first point effect is executed and the special point effect is not executed, the battle effect 216 (specific game effect) is not executed, and both the first point effect and the special point effect are executed. It is said that the jackpot reliability is lower than when it is done.

FIG. 96 (l) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 95 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 95 (b). In the above-described execution mode, all (4) rectangular image elements 272 inside the circular image element 272 are displayed at the two display timings (first timing and second timing) in the first point effect 274. An example is shown. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which all (4) rectangular image elements 272 inside the circular image element 272 are not displayed at a plurality of display timings in the first point effect 274. In FIG. 96 (l), the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and the upper horizontally long rectangular image element is displayed at the first timing of the first point effect 274 (first image display). The aspect is shown.

FIG. 97 (m) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 96 (l) in the same variation display as in FIG. 96 (l). In FIG. 97 (m), the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and in the second timing of the first point effect 274, in addition to the image element 272 displayed at the first timing, the image display notice effect 273 is horizontally long on the right side. The aspect in which the rectangular image element 272 is displayed is shown. Although not shown, when a special point effect is executed following this first point effect (two image elements are displayed), all the remaining three image elements are displayed and the preview image 271 is displayed. It may be a mode in which all the image elements of the above are displayed and completed, or even when the special point effect is executed, only one or two image elements are displayed, and a part of the image elements of the preview image 271 is hidden. As it is, there may be a mode in which the image display notice effect 273 is terminated. Further, in such a case, a larger number of image elements to be displayed in the image display notice effect 273 may be more likely to be a big hit (higher jackpot reliability) than a small number. Further, the first point effect may have a third timing and a fourth timing, and the display timing of the image element in the first point effect may be after the first timing and the second timing. As a result, the possibility that all the image elements of the preview image will be displayed is increased, and the game is enhanced.

FIG. 97 (n) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 95 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 95 (a). In the above-described execution mode, the image display notice effect 273 is started by showing the thin and broken line notice image 271 in a state where the three effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In this execution mode, with the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), the notice image 271 is displayed as the middle effect symbol 8C (at the position of the middle effect symbol 8C) to display the image display notice effect. 273 is executed. FIG. 97 (n) shows a state in which "1 (first stop symbol)" as the left effect symbol and "3 (second stop symbol)" as the right effect symbol are stopped and displayed, and is thinly displayed at the position of the middle effect symbol. The broken line preview image 271 is displayed.

In this execution mode, the notice image 271 is displayed and the image display notice effect 273 is executed with the left and right effect symbols 8 stopped and displayed. In the image display notice effect 273, the first point effect 274 and the special point effect 275 are executed. Is executed, and when the notice image 271 is displayed in a predetermined mode (when all the image elements are displayed), the mode in which the effect symbol starts the variable display again is shown. FIG. 97 (o) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 97 (n) in the same variation display as in FIG. 97 (n). In FIG. 97 (o), the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and the rectangular image element 272 inside the circular image element 272 at the first timing (first display timing) of the first point effect 274 is rectangular. The scene where the image element 272 and the rectangular image element 272 on the right side are displayed is shown.

FIG. 97 (p) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 97 (o) in the same variation display as in FIG. 97 (o). In FIG. 97 (p), the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and in addition to the image element displayed at the first timing at the second timing (second display timing) of the first point effect 274, A scene is shown in which the lower rectangular image element 272 inside the circular image element 272 and the left rectangular image element 272 are displayed. Then, the image elements (4 pieces) displayed in the first point effect 274 are displayed for the first specific time (first time) while maintaining the display state.

FIG. 97 (q) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 97 (p) in the same variation display as in FIG. 97 (p). In FIG. 97 (q), the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and in addition to the image element displayed in the first point effect 274, the circular image element 272 is displayed, and all of the notice image 271. Indicates a scene in which the image element 272 of the above is displayed. Then, the image elements (5 images, preview images) displayed in the first point effect 274 and the special point effect 275 are displayed for the second specific time (second time) while maintaining the display state. Although not shown, the above-mentioned special additional effect 276 may be executed between the first point effect 274 and the special point effect 275. FIG. 97 (r) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 97 (q) in the same variation display as in FIG. 97 (q).

In FIG. 97 (r), since all the image elements 272 of the preview image 272 are displayed in FIG. 97 (q) (due to the execution of the special point effect), the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner (re-variable). ) Indicates the scene. That is, in the present execution mode, the image display notice effect 273 serves as an opportunity for the re-variation display of the effect symbol. In addition, the higher the number of re-variable displays, the higher the jackpot reliability than the case where the number of re-variable displays is small, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the image display notice effect 273 and enhancing the game interest. Is possible. Further, after the variable display shown in FIG. 97 (r), the battle effect 216 (battle reach, character effect, specific game effect) may be executed, or FIGS. 97 (n) to 97 (q) are executed again. Then, the revariable display may be repeatedly executed.

Next, another execution mode of the image display notice effect 273 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. In this embodiment, the preview image 271 (specific decorative image) is formed by the combination of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, middle, and right, and each effect symbol 8 constituting the preview image 271 is combined with the image element 272. And. That is, the preview image 272 (“Mt. Fuji”) is composed of three image elements (“rich”, “shi”, and “mountain”).

FIG. 98A shows a scene in which a variable display of a predetermined effect symbol (special symbol) is being executed in a low load state. FIG. 98 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 98 (a) in the same variation display as in FIG. 98 (a). In FIG. 98 (b), the first point effect 274 (first image display) in the image display notice effect 273 (decorative image change effect) is executed, and the first timing (first display timing) of the first point effect 274 is executed. Then, as the left effect symbol (at the display position of the left effect symbol), the scene where the character "rich" which is the image element 272 constituting the preview image 271 is displayed is shown. In addition, the left side portion (part) of Mt. Fuji is displayed in the background portion (first background area) of the characters "wealth".

FIG. 98 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 98 (b) in the same variation display as in FIG. 98 (b). FIG. 98 (c) constitutes the notice image 271 as the right effect symbol (at the display position of the right effect symbol) at the second timing (second display timing) of the first point effect 274 of the image display advance notice effect 273. The scene where the character of "mountain" which is an image element 272 is displayed is shown. In addition, the right side (part) of Mt. Fuji is displayed in the background portion (third background area) of the characters "mountain". As a result, the two image elements (“rich” ↓ “mountain”) of the preview image 272 displayed at the two display points of the first point effect 274 are displayed, and the display state (“rich ↓”) is displayed. The display of "mountain") is maintained for the first specific time (first hour).

FIG. 98 (d) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 98 (c) in the same variation display as in FIG. 98 (c). FIG. 98 (d) shows that the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and the special point effect 275 (second image display) is executed after the first point effect 274 described above. The scene where 276 (fanning effect, special effect) is executed is shown. The special additional effect 276 is an effect that encourages whether or not the characters "shi", which is a part of the image elements constituting the preview image 272 ("Mt. Fuji"), are displayed as the middle effect symbol 8C. A specific image element (“shi”) and another symbol (“1”) are displayed at the display position of the middle effect symbol, and this is an effect indicating which one is stopped and displayed.

When a specific image element ("shi") is stopped and displayed in the special additional effect 276, all the image elements 272 of the preview image 272 are successfully displayed, and Mt. Fuji, which will be described later, has a relatively high hit reliability. Execute reach production 278 (special reach production). On the other hand, if the specific image element (“shi”) is not stopped and displayed in the special additional effect 276, the Mt. Fuji reach effect 278 (special reach effect) is not executed. As a result, when the special point effect is executed, that is, the image element 272 (“shi”) is displayed at a special timing, and all the preview images 271 are displayed (the specific character display “Mt. Fuji” is completed). The case is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the special point effect is not executed (the jackpot reliability is high).

FIG. 98 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 98 (d) in the same variation display as in FIG. 98 (d). In FIG. 98 (e), the special additional effect 276 in the image display notice effect 273 is continuously executed, and a specific image element (“shi”) is displayed as a middle effect symbol (at the display position of the middle effect symbol). We continue to produce a production that encourages whether or not it will be done. At this time, the display states of "wealth" and "mountain" are maintained on the left and right production symbols, and the two preview images 272 displayed at the two display points of the first point production 274, respectively. The display state of the image element is maintained. That is, it is set as the first specific time (first time) even during the execution of the special additional effect 276.

FIG. 98 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 98 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 98 (e). FIG. 98 (f) continuously executes the special additional effect 276 in the image display notice effect 273, enlarges and displays a specific image element (“shi”) at the display position of the middle effect symbol, and displays a specific image. This is a scene in which an effect is executed to indicate to the player that the element (“shi”) is stopped and displayed as a medium effect symbol. FIG. 99 (g) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 98 (f) in the same variation display as in FIG. 98 (f). FIG. 99 (g) shows a scene in which an image element (“shi”) constituting the preview image 271 (specific decorative image) is displayed at a special timing in the special point effect 275.

As a result, all the image elements 272 constituting the preview image 271 are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the preview image 271 is completed and displayed (“Mt. Fuji”). In addition, the image element ("shi") displayed at the special timing (special display timing) in the special point effect is replaced with the image element ("rich", "") displayed at the first timing and the second timing in the first point effect. Together with the mountain "), the display state is maintained for the second specific time (second time). In addition, the central part (part) of Mt. Fuji was displayed in the background part (second background area) of the characters of "shi", and was displayed in the first background area, the second background area, and the third background area, respectively. A part of Mt. Fuji is united, and the pattern of Mt. Fuji (specific pattern) is completed and displayed.

FIG. 99 (h) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 99 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 99 (g). In FIG. 99 (h), after the end of the image display notice effect 273, the characters "Mt. Fuji reach" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a pattern imitating Mt. Fuji is displayed in the background. As a result, the image element is displayed in the special point effect 275 (second image display), and based on the completed display (all display) of the notice image 271, the reach of Mt. Fuji corresponding to the notice image 271 (“Mt. Fuji”). It is shown that the production 278 is performed. The Mt. Fuji reach effect 278 may be a dedicated effect that is executed only when the special point effect 275 (second image display) is executed.

FIG. 99 (i) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 99 (g) in the same variation display as in FIG. 99 (g). In FIG. 99 (i), an effect symbol (“7 ↓ 7”) in a reach mode is displayed on the upper left and right of the display screen 7a, and Mt. Fuji reach effect 278 (special reach effect, special character effect, specific game effect) is executed. Shows the scene. FIG. 99 (j) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 99 (i) in the same variation display as in FIG. 99 (i). FIG. 99 (j) shows a scene in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode (“777”) as a result of executing the Mt. Fuji reach effect 278 shown in FIG. 99 (i). As a result, the jackpot game is executed after this. In this execution mode, as a result of the Mt. Fuji reach effect 278, there are cases where the jackpot is a big hit and cases where the hit is missed. Further, instead of such an aspect, when the Mt. Fuji reach effect 278 is executed, a big hit may be made (a big hit game is executed). In this way, it is possible to remarkably enhance the game entertainment when the image display notice effect is executed.

FIG. 99 (k) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from FIG. 99 (e) in the same variation display as in FIG. 98 (e). In the above-described execution mode, the execution mode in which the special additional effect 276 shown in FIG. 98 (e) is successful, the character "shi", which is a specific image element, is stopped and displayed, and the special point effect is executed is shown. .. In this execution mode, a scene is shown in which the special additional effect 276 shown in FIG. 98 (e) fails and the effect symbol “9” different from the image element constituting the preview image is fixedly stopped and displayed as the middle effect symbol (“9”). Tomi 9 Mountains "). As a result, the deviation is confirmed and the Mt. Fuji reach production is not executed. In this embodiment, if the special additional effect 276 fails and the preview image "Mt. Fuji" is not displayed, the Mt. Fuji reach effect is not executed.

As described above, by displaying the image elements constituting the preview image in order at predetermined timings (first timing, second timing, special timing) during the execution of the image display notice effect, the notice is given. It is possible to change the display mode of the image. Further, when all the image elements constituting the preview image are displayed, the game effect that is likely to be a big hit is executed, so that the player enhances the game interest.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the number and types of the advance notice effect species to be determined are maintained. , Only the number of notice effects belonging to the notice effect type is reduced. Therefore, the above-mentioned game effect (image display notice effect) can be executed in any of the low load state and the high load state, but the number of execution modes differs depending on the state. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced.

Specifically, in the low load state, all the patterns of the above-mentioned game effect (image display notice effect) can be executed, and in the high load state, some patterns of the above-mentioned game effect (image display notice effect) are executed. It may be possible. For example, in a high load state, it has an execution mode that cannot be executed (not selected). As a result, it is possible to reduce the control processing load of the game production and prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment. Further, in the above-described execution mode, more execution modes may be executed in the low load state than in the high load state.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the game effect is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the low load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the low load state, and as a notice effect that cannot be executed in the high load state. It may be a notice effect that cannot be decided by the notice decision table for a high load state. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, diversify the execution mode of the advance notice effect, and optimize the control process applied to the game effect control unit. Become.

Further, instead of such an aspect, the game effect is set as a notice effect that can be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state as a notice effect that can be executed in the high load state, and as a notice effect that cannot be executed in the low load state. It may be a notice effect that cannot be decided by the notice decision table for the low load state. Even in such an aspect, the advance notice effect to be determined is changed according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit, the execution mode of the advance notice effect is diversified, and the control process applied to the game effect control unit is optimized. It becomes possible.

[Other Aspect 1]
In the above-described first embodiment, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the advance notice effect is maintained while maintaining the number and types of the advance notice effect types to be determined. Only the number of notice effects belonging to the species is reduced. As a result, it is better to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the high load state advance notice determination table than to perform the advance notice effect determination process using the low load state advance notice determination table. The amount of processing was decided to be reduced. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, in the advance notice determination table for the high load state, the advance notice effect species that can be executed while reducing the number of advance notice effects to be determined as compared with the advance notice determination table for the low load state. You may change the type of.

Specifically, in the notice determination table for the low load state shown in FIG. 52, four types of notice effects such as conversation notice effect, step-up notice effect, cut-in notice effect, and movable part notice effect can be executed. .. On the other hand, in the notice determination table for the low load state of the other aspect 1 shown in FIG. There is. According to this aspect, in a low load state, a total of 15 types of advance notice effects belonging to 4 types of advance notice effect types are targeted for determination, and 0 to a maximum of 4 advance notice effects can be executed. Further, in a high load state, a total of 6 types of advance notice effects belonging to 4 types of advance notice effect types are targeted for determination, and 0 to a maximum of 4 advance notice effects can be executed. The step-up notice effect and the cut-in notice effect are the notice effect type (notice effect) dedicated to the low load state, and the pattern notice effect and the background notice effect are the notice effect type (notice effect) dedicated to the high load state. Will be done.

As a result, the advance notice effect dedicated to the low load state is provided even in the low load state, and the advance notice effect dedicated to the high load state is provided even in the high load state. Therefore, the control load of the sub control unit becomes an issue. While preventing it, it is possible to diversify the game production in both states. Further, in the other aspect 1, although some of the advance notice effect types are different, all the feasible advance notice effect types may be changed to different advance notice effect types. Further, in the advance notice effect species to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the high load state, the number of advance notice effects belonging to at least one advance notice effect type is reduced. The number of advance notice effects to which the advance notice effect species belong may be reduced. Further, for all the advance notice effect types, the number of advance notice effects to which they belong may be fixed to one advance notice effect.

Here, the pattern notice effect is a possibility of becoming a big hit by displaying a pattern such as a predetermined character, a pattern, or a background displayed on the display screen 7a in a pattern different from the normal pattern (special game). It is a notice production showing the feasibility of. For example, the moon character displayed in the background is usually displayed in yellow, but is made into a polka dot pattern at a predetermined timing. As a result, the player is notified that the result of the variable display of the effect symbol having the polka dot pattern is a predetermined degree (for example, 10%) of the possibility of becoming a big hit. In addition, by displaying the moon character in a tiger pattern, it is notified that the possibility of a big hit is higher than that of a polka dot and the possibility of a big hit is high (for example, 50%).

Further, the background notice effect indicates the feasibility of the special game by displaying a specific character on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol). In this example, when a "rainbow" is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is assumed that the possibility of executing the special game is relatively high (for example, 33%).

[Other Aspect 2]
In the above-described second embodiment, the advance notice effect type to be determined in the notice determination table for the high load state is one of the advance notice effect types (4 types) to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the low load state. By fixing to the type (cut-in notice effect), the amount of processing related to the advance notice effect determination process is reduced. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. In the advance notice determination table for the high load state of the second embodiment, one of the advance notice effect types to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the low load state is used as it is (with the same number and types of advance notice effects to which it belongs). ) It is supposed to be used. In this other aspect, instead of this, the content of the advance notice effect type to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the high load state shall be partially changed.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 61 (A), as the advance notice determination table for the high load state, the advance notice effect is determined by fixing to the cut-in advance notice effect type included in the low load state, but the cut-in advance notice is determined. As the advance notice effect belonging to the effect type, it is possible to execute a advance notice effect different from the advance notice effect belonging to the cut-in advance notice effect type to be determined in the advance notice determination table for the low load state. In addition, the number of notice effects belonging to the cut-in notice effect species is increasing. As a result, in the high load state, the number of advance notice effects to be determined is significantly reduced as compared with the low load state, but the number of advance notice effects to which the determination target is limited is increasing. , It is possible to diversify the production mode of the advance notice production type.

Therefore, in the other aspect 2, in the high load state, the number of advance notice effect species to be determined and the number of advance notice effects are reduced (fixed) as compared with the low load state, but the advance notice effect to be determined is determined. Regarding the number of advance notice effects belonging to the species, the high load state is characterized in that it is larger than the low load state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game production in a high load state and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 61B, the advance notice determination table for the high load state is fixed to the cut-in advance notice effect type included in the advance notice determination table for the low load state, and the advance notice effect type (cut-in) is further fixed. The mode in which the determinable notice effect belonging to the notice effect type) is also fixed is shown. That is, in this aspect, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in the advance notice effect determination process, and when it is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed, a specific advance notice effect (in this example, the cut-in related to the character C) is always performed. Notice production) is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing for the advance notice effect determination process in a high load state as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the game effect of the sub control unit from becoming excessive.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 61 (C-1) and 61 (C-2), the number of advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice determination table for the high load state is determined by the advance notice determination table for the low load state. Although the number is smaller than the number of the target advance notice production species, the mode in which the number is set to a plurality of advance notice effect species is shown. Specifically, the cut-in notice production type and the pattern notice production type are to be determined. That is, it is possible to determine and execute up to two types of advance notice effects (notice effects). In addition, some of the notice effect types to be decided in the notice determination table for the high load state are different from the notice effect types to be decided in the notice decision table for the low load state, and some of them are the same rehearsal effect species. However, instead of this, all may be different notice production types, or all may be the same notice production type.

[Other Aspect 3]
Further, as another aspect, it is also possible to set a high load state and a low load state according to the gaming state. Specifically, the first control is a state in which the number of controls related to the game effect (pieces / second) is large, which is obtained by dividing the number of controls related to the game effect that needs to be executed during the variable display of the effect symbol by the average fluctuation time. It is also possible to set a state and a state less than the first control state as a second control state. As an example of this, it is possible to set the second control state as a time-saving state in which the average fluctuation time is short, and the first control state as a non-time-saving state (normal state) in which the average fluctuation time is longer than the time-saving state. Therefore, in the non-time saving state (normal state) in which the first control state (specific flag OFF state) is set, the number of advance notice effects (game effects) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination process (game effect determination process) is secondly controlled. It is possible to execute various game effects by increasing the number of states, and in the time-saving state in which the second control state (specific flag ON state) is set, the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination process. It is possible to prevent the control load of the sub-control unit from becoming an issue by reducing the number of

[Other Aspect 4]
Further, as another aspect, a game effect involving input to the effect button (first effect button 63a or second effect button 63b) may be executed in a high load state. Further, a high load state may be set when the display control amount of the board lamp, the frame lamp, or the like becomes abnormal by a predetermined amount. Further, a high load state may be set when a game effect accompanied by motion control of a movable portion is executed, or when a game effect accompanied by motion control of a movable portion and a particularly large amount of control processing related to motion control is performed. In either case, the specific flag shall be turned ON when the load is high.

[Other Aspect 5]
Further, as another aspect, when the low load state is set during the big hit game, the notice effect is determined during the big hit game based on a notice effect determination table or the like different from that during the non-big hit game. Then, the variable display to be determined such as the advance notice effect may be the variable display related to the pending information for which the variable start condition is not satisfied. That is, during the big hit game in which the load on the control processing of the sub-control unit is low, the advance notice effect of the execution schedule related to the hold information is determined using the advance notice determination table for the low load state in which various advance notice effects can be determined. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute various game effects even in a high load state after that.

In addition, during the low load state (during the big hit game), a predetermined number of notice effect execution patterns that can execute one or more notice effects are created and stored, and the variation display of each effect symbol after the end of the big hit is displayed. It is also possible to select from the advance notice effect execution pattern and execute it each time it starts. This notice effect execution pattern can be updated each time a low load state (big hit game) occurs.

[Other Aspect 6]
It should be noted that, among the first, third, and fourth embodiments, two or more configurations may be combined to set a state in which a high load state is determined, that is, a state in which the specific flag is turned ON. For example, the specific flag may be turned ON at both times during the execution of the effect start process at the time of entering the ball and the execution of the variable effect start process, and the specific flag may be turned OFF at other times. Further, when the effect start process at the time of entering the ball and the variable effect start process are executed in duplicate, it may be regarded as a high load state and the specific flag may be turned ON. Further, the application patterns of the notice determination table for the low load state and the notice determination table for the high load state described in the examples and other embodiments can be applied to the other embodiments or other embodiments. .. All of these combinations are included in the present invention.

[Other Aspect 7]
Further, in the present embodiment, the value "M" of the effect mode counter is set to a different value depending on the type of hit, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. As another aspect, the effect mode set according to the type of hit may be continued until the gaming state changes. The change in the game state includes, for example, the execution of the next big hit game, the change from the high probability state to the low probability state, the change from the open extension state to the non-open extension state, and the time saving state. It may change to a non-time saving state. It also includes the opposite of these aspects.

[Other Aspect 8]
Next, another aspect 3 of Example 1 and Reference Example described above will be described. In the third aspect of the present invention, in the second prize-winning device 36 of the first embodiment and the reference example, a shutter member (also referred to as an “acting member”) that allows or blocks the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39 inside. ) Can be provided. That is, when the second special winning device 36 is provided with the shutter member and the shutter member is in the first state of hindering (preventing) the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39, the ball enters the second big winning opening 35. The game ball has passed through a non-specific area other than the specific area 39, and when the shutter member is in the second state of allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area 39, the game ball has entered the second large winning opening 35. May be configured to pass through a specific area 39 instead of a non-specific area. The solenoid that drives the shutter member is connected to the main control board 80. When such a shutter member is provided, the shutter member may be controlled to the first state to close the specific area 39 during 1R and 2R when the second big winning opening 35 is opened in the 15R second big hit. ..

By doing so, even if the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 during the opening for a very short time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball is surely prevented from passing through the specific area 39. be able to. Further, in 1R and 2R in the 15R second jackpot, the shutter member is closed when the shutter member is in the second state, and the second prize opening 35 is opened when the shutter member is in the first state. If the opening and closing control of the large winning opening 35 is performed, even if the maximum opening time of the second large winning opening 35 is set to a length that allows the game ball to enter sufficiently (for example, 28 seconds), the game can be played in the specific area 39. It is possible to prevent the ball from passing through. When it is desired to pass the game ball through the specific area 39 in the 15R first big hit or the like, the shutter member may be controlled to the second state while the second big winning opening 35 is open. That is, the shutter member may be controlled to the second state during the above-mentioned V effective period (first period). Further, in the first embodiment, it is possible to pass through a specific area even if it is a small hit, but by setting the shutter member in the first state during the small hit game, the game ball is specified during the small hit game. It can be prevented from passing through the area. Further, in addition to this configuration, whether or not the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 has passed through the specific area 39 due to the installation location of the specific area 39 and the covering portion provided in front of the player side of the specific area 39. May be a mode that is difficult for the player to see.

[Other Aspect 9]
Whether or not the processing amount of the control related to the game effect is larger than the predetermined amount can be determined by whether or not the processing amount of the control related to the game effect excluding the game effect determining process is larger than the predetermined amount. When the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process is small, a large amount of processing is performed as the game effect determination process, and the amount of control related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process is large. In this case, a determination process with a small amount of processing is performed as a game effect determination process. As a result, it is possible to balance the control load related to the game effect control unit by changing the processing amount of the game effect determination process according to the process amount (processing state) of the control related to the game effect excluding the game effect determination process. .. In addition, it is possible to perform various game effects by controlling appropriate game effects without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit.

Further, in the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, the "game effect" refers to an effect performed using a predetermined character or an effect performed using identification information (effect symbol, special symbol, etc.), for example, a notice effect, Character production and reach production can be mentioned. Further, the game production is considered to belong to any one of the plurality of game production types. Further, as a notice effect, a pseudo-variation notice effect may be provided. The pseudo-variation notice effect is a notice effect that indicates that the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment may be a big hit. It is a production that makes it appear as if it is displayed in a pseudo manner multiple times. For example, "pseudo 1 (pseudo-variation 1)" means that the variation display is performed twice by performing one temporary stop display and a re-variation display after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol. It is a production, and as the number of pseudo 2 and pseudo 3 increases, the number of pseudo fluctuation displays increases, and at the same time, the jackpot reliability also increases.

Further, in the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, a variable entry port that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a first hit / fail determination or It is possible to provide a special game execution unit capable of executing a special game in which the variable entry port (large winning opening) is in a state where the ball can be entered when the result of the second hit / fail determination is successful. Further, the "starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect, and the "starting port" is The variable start port may be provided separately. In addition, there are a first game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than in the first game state. It can be provided with a game state setting unit to be set to. Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set. It may be multiple times or may have different open times.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the control process of preferentially digesting the second special figure hold over the first special figure hold, the so-called special figure 2 priority control process, is not limited to this, and the first special figure hold is not limited to this. May be a control process that gives priority to the second special figure hold, that is, a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, that is, a control process of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine having a specific region 39 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol winning / failing determination is made without having the specific region 39 in the large winning opening. It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine in which it is determined whether or not a high probability state is given after the end of the jackpot game based only on the result (type of jackpot symbol displayed stopped). Needless to say, "based on the fact that the special symbol is a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol)", this type of gaming machine is also implemented. The pachinko gaming machine of Example 1 and other types of gaming machines are also included. In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting unit (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port is increased. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

[others]
(Reference Invention 1)
In a gaming machine that has a plurality of effect modes and executes different game effects depending on the effect mode to be executed as in a conventional game machine, the burden of control processing when executing the game effect increases, and the game machine It could not be said that it was the optimum control process, and there was room for improvement. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having various gaming effects, which performs optimal effect control processing and enhances the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
A game production control unit that executes control related to the game production,
A gaming machine including a special game execution unit that executes a special game that enables the variable entry port to enter a ball when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result.
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, the advance notice effect is not determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state. Is.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in the first control state, and to diversify the game effect as a whole and enhance the game interest. Is possible.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1.
At least a part of the advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit determines in the first control state and the advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit determines in the second control state are different. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, the advance notice effect executed in the first control state and the advance notice effect executed in the second control state are different, that is, either the first control state or the second control state. Also provided a notice effect that is not executed by each other. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the first control state and the second control state, and it is possible to diversify the game production as a whole and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or Reference Invention 1-2.
The number of advance notice effects that can be executed in the first control state is larger than the number of advance notice effects that can be executed in the second control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. , It is possible to determine a number of advance notice effects larger than those in the second control state as the determination target of the advance notice effect determination unit. As a result, the number of advance notice effects and the number of advance notice effects to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit are changed according to the control processing amount (control burden) of the game effect control unit to diversify the advance notice effects and promote the game. It becomes possible to increase. In addition, it is possible to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Further, in the second control state in which the amount of processing of the effect control process executed by the game effect control unit is large, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice performance determination unit is smaller than that in the first control state in which the amount of processing is small. It is possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the game production control unit as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball into the starting port.
As the control processing controlled by the game effect control unit, the ball entry advance notice effect control process executed when the ball enters the start port, and the change start advance notice effect control process executed at the start of the variation display of the identification information. Have,
The second control state is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed.
The first control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is executed when the ball enters the starting port, and the first control state is set to the entering ball. Time notice This is a predetermined time when the effect control process is not being executed. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entry is not executed, the advance notice effect that is not determined when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the advance notice effect control process at the time of entry is performed. It becomes possible to make a decision target. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect that can be determined according to the control state (control load), enhance the game interest, and optimize the control process (game effect control process) of the game effect control unit.

The notice effect at the time of entry is executed on the condition that the ball enters the starting port, and the change display of the identification information based on the entry is started. Not a condition. Therefore, the advance notice effect at the time of entering the ball may start before the start of the variable display of the identification information based on the entry, and such a advance advance notice effect (pre-reading advance notice) or advance advance notice effect (advance notice) may be performed. Notice). Further, the variation start advance notice effect executed by the variation start advance notice effect control process is a advance notice effect executed on condition that the variation display of the identification information based on the entry is started. Therefore, the notice effect at the start of the change is a notice effect executed during the execution of the change display of the identification information based on the entry.

Further, when the number of the advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is smaller than that in the first control state, whether or not the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed, that is, the game effect control. Depending on the amount of processing, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit can be changed, and it is possible to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. In addition, when the advance notice effect control process at the time of entering the ball is not being executed and the amount of processing of the game effect control process is small, the advance notice effect decision unit increases the number of advance notice effects to be determined, which is excessive for the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the advance notice production (game production) without imposing a load and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
The predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball into the starting port.
As the control processing controlled by the game effect control unit, the ball entry control process executed when the ball enters the start port, the change start notice effect control process executed when the variation display of the identification information is started, and the change start advance notice effect control process. Have,
The second control state is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is being executed.
The first control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is set to a predetermined time when the change start advance notice effect control process is executed at the start of the change display of the identification information, and the first control state is set to the change start time. It is a predetermined time when the advance notice effect control process is not executed. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed when the change start advance notice effect control process is not executed, the advance notice effect that is not determined when the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the change start advance notice effect control process is performed. It becomes possible to make a decision target. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect that can be determined according to the control state (control burden of the game effect control unit), enhance the game interest, and optimize the effect control process.

Further, when the number of the advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is smaller than that in the first control state, whether or not the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is being executed, that is, the game effect control. It is possible to change the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the processing amount of the effect control process of the unit, and to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Further, when the advance notice effect control process at the start of fluctuation is not being executed and the processing amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is increased to increase the amount of the advance notice effect, which causes an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the notice production and enhance the game entertainment without spending time.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
The first control state is a predetermined time when the special game is being executed.
The second control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time when the special game is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing of the game effect control unit is small is set to a predetermined time during the execution of the special game, and the processing amount of the effect control process of the game effect control unit is large. The second control state, which is often used, is a predetermined time when the special game is not executed (for example, a predetermined time during the variable display of the identification information, a predetermined time during the control process related to the variable display of the identification information, etc.). As a result, during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute a notice effect different from that when the special game is not executed, and it is possible to enhance the game interest during the special game. For example, the advance notice effect that can be executed during the special game is different from the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display of the identification information, and the advance notice effect can be diversified.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
A first time state in which a predetermined time is set as the variation display time of the identification information and a second time state in which a variation display time shorter than the first time state can be set as the variation display time of the identification information are set. Equipped with a possible variable display time setting unit
The first control state is set to a predetermined time in the first time state.
The second control state is characterized in that it is set to a predetermined time in the second time state.

According to such a gaming machine, the second control state is a predetermined time in the second time state that can take a short fluctuation display time, and the first control state is a predetermined time in the first time state that can take a long fluctuation display time. It is the time. Then, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed in the first time state where the long variable display time is easy to be selected, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed in the second time state where the short variable display time is easy to be selected. It is possible to make a decision target for a notice effect that is not decided. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect that can be determined according to the control state (control burden of the game effect control unit), enhance the game interest, and optimize the effect control process.

Further, the second control state may be the first time state, and the first control state may be the second time state. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit.

Further, a probability setting unit that can be set to a predetermined probability (first probability) or a higher probability (second probability) higher than the predetermined probability as the probability that the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result is provided, and the second control is provided. The state may have a high probability, and the first control state may have a predetermined probability. Further, the first control state may have a high probability, and the second control state may have a predetermined probability. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit.

In addition, a ball entry port (variable start port) that can be changed to the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect, and the first frequency state (low). A frequency state (low base state) and a second frequency state (high frequency state, high base state) in which the ball enters the ball entry port (variable start port) more frequently than the first frequency state can be set. A ball frequency setting unit may be provided, the second control state may be the second frequency state, and the first control state may be the first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be the first frequency state, and the first control state may be the second frequency state. This also makes it possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. ..

Moreover, you may combine some or all of these. Specifically, the second control state may be the second time state and the high probability and the second frequency state, and the first control state may be the first time state and the predetermined probability and the first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be the second time state and the high probability and the second frequency state, and the second control state may be the first time state and the predetermined probability and the first frequency state. Further, the second control state may be set to the second time state and the second frequency state, and the first control state may be set to the first time state and the first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be set to the second time state and the second frequency state, and the second control state may be set to the first time state and the first frequency state. Further, the second control state may be set to the high probability and first frequency state, and the first control state may be set to the predetermined probability and first frequency state. Further, the first control state may be set to the high probability and second frequency state, and the second control state may be set to the predetermined probability and first frequency state. Also with these, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect (game effect) to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. ..

(Reference Invention 2)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game production control unit that performs a predetermined production control process,
A gaming machine including a special game execution unit that executes a special game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode.
The game effect control unit has a advance notice effect determination unit that determines the advance notice effect to be executed, and a advance notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit can execute the advance notice effect along with the variable display of the identification information.
At least, there are a first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is larger than the predetermined amount.
The number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is smaller than the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing executed by the game effect control unit is large, the processing amount of the effect control processing is smaller than in the second control state. , It is possible to reduce the number of advance notice effects to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit of the game effect control unit.

As a result, it is possible to change the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the processing amount of the effect control process, and to prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. In addition, when the processing amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit determines is increased to diversify the advance notice effect without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1.
The number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number.
The number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to such a gaming machine, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number, and the advance notice to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state. It is possible to set the number of effects to a second predetermined number, which is smaller than the first predetermined number. As a result, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced in the second control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is large, and the advance notice effect determination unit is in the first control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is small. It is possible to increase the number of advance notice effects to be decided, and it is possible to diversify the game effects without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2.
The number of advance notice effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is the same in the first control state and the second control state.

According to such a gaming machine, the number of game effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit, that is, the number of playable game effects can be the same in both the first control state and the second control state. It will be possible. As a result, when the processing amount of the effect control process is large (second control state), even if the number of game effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, the number of determinable advance notice effects is not reduced. , It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3.
The maximum number of advance notice effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is the same in the first control state and the second control state.

According to such a gaming machine, the maximum number of advance notice effects that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit, that is, the maximum number of playable game effects that can be determined is the same in both the first control state and the second control state. It becomes possible. As a result, when the amount of effect control processing is large (second control state), even if the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, the maximum number of game effects that can be determined is not reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-4.
The game effect control unit is characterized in that the advance notice effect determination unit performs the advance notice effect determination process based on the start of the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect determination process by the advance notice effect determination unit at least based on the start of the variable display of the identification information. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the amount of processing of the effect control process when starting the variable display of the identification information. Here, "execution based on the start of the variable display of the identification information" is executed based on the start of the variable display of the identification information, and even if it is performed before the start of the variable display of the identification information. It may be performed after the start, or at the same time as the start.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-5.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
As the effect control process, there is a ball entry control process that is executed based on the ball entry into the start port.
The second control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is being executed, and the first control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, a state in which the effect control process at the time of ball entry is executed based on the ball entering the starting port is set as a second control state, and a state in which the effect control process at the time of ball entry is not executed is defined as a state in which the effect control process at the time of ball entry is not executed. The first control state is set. When the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the ball entry control process, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, and the ball entry control process is not executed. Occasionally, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed, it is possible to increase the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.

As a result, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is changed depending on whether or not the effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed, that is, the processing amount of the effect control process, and the control load applied to the game effect control unit. Can be prevented from becoming excessive. In addition, when the effect control process at the time of entering the ball is not being executed and the amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect decision unit increases the advance notice effect to be determined, thereby putting an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the advance notice production without making a call and enhance the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 3)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game production control unit that performs a predetermined production control process,
A gaming machine including a special game execution unit that executes a special game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode.
The game effect control unit has a advance notice effect determination unit that determines the advance notice effect to be executed, and a advance notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect is composed of a plurality of advance notice effect types having different production modes, and each of the advance notice effect types is composed of one or a plurality of advance notice effects.
The advance notice effect execution unit can execute the advance notice effect along with the variable display of the identification information.
At least, there are a first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is larger than the predetermined amount.
The number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is the number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state. It is characterized by being less than.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing executed by the game effect control unit is large, compared to the first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control processing is smaller than in the second control state. , It is possible to reduce the number of advance notice effect types to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit of the game effect control unit.

As a result, it is possible to change the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the processing amount of the effect control process, and prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. .. In addition, when the processing amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect determination unit increases the number of advance notice effect types to be determined, thereby diversifying the advance notice effect without imposing an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1.
The number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number.
The number of the advance notice effect species to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number. ..

According to such a gaming machine, the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state is set to the first predetermined number, and the advance notice effect determination unit is determined in the second control state. It is possible to set the number of advance notice production species to a second predetermined number, which is smaller than the first predetermined number. As a result, the number of advance notice effect types to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced in the second control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is large, and the advance notice effect is determined in the first control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is small. It is possible to increase the number of advance notice production types to be decided by the department, and it is possible to diversify the advance notice production without imposing an excessive load on the game production control unit and enhance the game interest. Here, the "first predetermined number" is 2 or more, and the "second predetermined number" is 1 or more.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2.
When the game effect is determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state, a predetermined specific advance notice effect type is determined.
The advance notice effect execution unit is characterized in that it executes a advance notice effect belonging to the specific advance notice effect type.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is large, the advance notice effect type that can be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit can be set as a specific advance notice effect type. As a result, in the first control state where the processing amount of the effect control process is small, it is possible to execute a plurality of advance notice effects having different notice effect types, and in the second control state, the advance notice effects belonging to a specific advance notice effect type are executed. Make it possible. Further, when the processing amount of the effect control process is large, it is possible to fix the advance notice effect type to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit and prevent the control load applied to the game effect control unit from becoming excessive. Become.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3.
The number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the second control state is the advance notice to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state. It is characterized in that it is less than the number of advance notice productions belonging to the production type.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the amount of processing of the effect control process is large, the advance notice effect determination unit reduces the number of determinable advance notice effect types and belongs to the determinable advance notice effect species. It is also possible to reduce the number of advance notices. Further, in the first control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect to be executed from the plurality of advance notice effect types and the plurality of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type, while the second control state. In some cases, even if the number of advance notice effects is less than that of the first control state, the number of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type is also smaller than that of the first control state, and the advance notice effect to be executed is determined.

As a result, when the amount of processing of the effect control process is large, both the advance notice effect type to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit and the advance notice effect belonging to the advance notice effect type are reduced, so that the game effect control unit is affected. It is possible to prevent the control load from becoming excessive. Here, it is sufficient that the advance notice effect type to be determined in the second control state has at least one advance notice effect type in which the number of the advance notice effects to which the number belongs is reduced.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4.
When the advance notice effect determination unit determines to execute the predetermined advance notice effect type in the first control state, the predetermined advance notice effect is determined from a plurality of advance notice effects belonging to the advance notice effect type.
When the advance notice effect determination unit determines to execute the predetermined advance notice effect type in the second control state, it is characterized in that a predetermined specific advance notice effect is determined.

According to such a gaming machine, in the second control state in which the processing amount of the effect control process is large, the advance notice effect determination unit reduces the number of determinable advance notice effect types and belongs to the determinable advance notice effect species. It is possible to fix the advance notice effect. As a result, when the amount of processing of the effect control process is large, if the advance notice effect determination unit determines the advance notice effect type, the advance notice effect to be executed is determined accordingly, and the control load applied to the game effect control unit is increased. It is possible to prevent it from becoming excessive.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-5.
The game effect control unit is characterized in that the advance notice effect determination unit performs the advance notice effect determination process based on the start of the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute the advance notice effect determination process by the advance notice effect determination unit at least based on the start of the variable display of the identification information. As a result, it is possible to change the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit depending on the amount of processing of the effect control process when starting the variable display of the identification information. Here, "execution based on the start of the variable display of the identification information" is executed based on the start of the variable display of the identification information, and even if it is performed before the start of the variable display of the identification information. It may be performed after the start, or at the same time as the start.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 3-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-6.
Equipped with a start port that allows game balls to enter
As the effect control process, there is a ball entry control process that is executed based on the ball entry into the start port.
The second control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is being executed, and the first control state is a state in which the ball entry control process is not being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, a state in which the effect control process at the time of ball entry is executed based on the ball entering the starting port is set as a second control state, and a state in which the effect control process at the time of ball entry is not executed is defined as a state in which the effect control process at the time of ball entry is not executed. The first control state is set. When the advance notice effect determination process is performed during the execution of the ball entry control process, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is reduced, and the ball entry control process is not executed. Occasionally, when the advance notice effect determination process is performed, it is possible to increase the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit.

As a result, the number of advance notice effects to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit is changed depending on whether or not the effect control process at the time of entering the ball is being executed, that is, the processing amount of the effect control process, and the control load applied to the game effect control unit. Can be prevented from becoming excessive. In addition, when the effect control process at the time of entering the ball is not being executed and the amount of the effect control process is small, the advance notice effect decision unit increases the advance notice effect to be determined, thereby putting an excessive load on the game effect control unit. It is possible to diversify the advance notice production without making a call and enhance the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 4)
In a conventional gaming machine, a hit / fail judgment is made with a predetermined jackpot probability based on the ball entering the starting port, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. There was one that performed a jackpot game that opened the winning opening. In addition, there is a possibility that a game effect (notice effect, reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed along with the variable display of the symbol, and the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol. The possibility of stop display (big hit reliability) was shown by (for example, JP-A-10-57583).

In addition, as game effects (notice effect, reach effect, character effect, etc.), there are a plurality of game effects having different execution modes, and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the game effect to be executed. As a result, the player's game interest is enhanced when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, and the game interest is further enhanced when the jackpot is advantageous. In a gaming machine as described above, when a game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, the game entertainment taste is enhanced, but on the other hand, the production mode of the game production is uniform and there is a possibility that the game entertainment taste is deteriorated. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a gaming effect that enhances the interest of the gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution unit that executes a special game that enables the variable entry port to enter the ball, and a special game execution unit.
A gaming machine provided with a possibility suggestion notification unit that suggests the feasibility of the special game.
The possibility suggestion notification unit
A possibility suggestion image color setting unit for setting the color of the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game from a plurality of colors corresponding to the feasibility of the special game.
The possibility suggestion image display unit for displaying the possibility suggestion image with the color set by the possibility suggestion image color setting unit, and the possibility suggestion image display unit.
After the possibility suggestion image is displayed by the possibility suggestion image display unit, an effect image color display unit that displays an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image. , Is characterized by having.

According to such a game machine, the possibility suggestion notification unit suggesting the feasibility of the special game can change the color of the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game from a plurality of colors of the special game. The possibility suggestion image color setting part that is set according to the feasibility, the possibility suggestion image display part that displays the possibility suggestion image with the set color, and the possibility suggestion image are displayed in the set color. After that, an effect image color display unit for displaying an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image is provided. This makes it possible to enhance the taste of the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game. That is, after the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game is displayed, the possibility is displayed by displaying an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image corresponding to the display mode of the possibility suggestion image. Since other effects suggesting the feasibility of the special game change depending on the display mode of the suggestion image, it is possible to enhance the taste of the suggestion image.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
After the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the first color, a production image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a color corresponding to the first color of the possibility suggestion image, and the possibility suggestion. After the image is displayed in the second color, there is a case where an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a color corresponding to the second color of the possibility suggestion image.
After the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second color, it is more possible to display an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image in a color corresponding to the second color of the possibility suggestion image. After the sex suggestion image is displayed in the first color, the special game is executed as compared with the case where the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the color corresponding to the first color of the possibility suggestion image. It is characterized by suggesting a high possibility.

According to such a game machine, the possibility suggestion image color setting unit has at least a first color and a second color as colors that can be set, and the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the first color. Later, when the effect suggestion image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the color corresponding to the first color, and after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second color, the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second. It has a case of displaying in a color corresponding to a color and a case of displaying in a color corresponding to the color. Then, it is assumed that the case where the special game is displayed in the second color is more likely to be the feasibility of the special game than the case where the special game is displayed in the first color. As a result, changes in the display mode between the possibility suggestion image and other production images are diversified, and it is possible to raise interest in which color the possibility suggestion image is displayed and to enhance the interest of the game. ..

Further, in addition to such an aspect, after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the first color, an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is made to correspond to the first color of the possibility suggestion image. When the possibility does not change (there is no change to the corresponding color), and after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second color, an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed as the second possibility suggestion image. There may be a case where the color corresponding to the color does not change (there is no change to the corresponding color).

In this case, after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second color, a production image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a color corresponding to the second color of the possibility suggestion image. However, after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the second color, the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image does not change to the color corresponding to the second color of the possibility suggestion image (to the corresponding color). It may suggest that the special game is more likely to be performed than the case where there is no change in the above. Similarly, in the case where the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the first color and then the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the color corresponding to the first color of the possibility suggestion image. However, after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in the first color, the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image does not change to the color corresponding to the first color of the possibility suggestion image (to the corresponding color). It may suggest that the special game is more likely to be performed than the case where there is no change in the above.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or Reference Invention 4-2.
The possibility suggestion image that first displays the color suggesting the feasibility of the special game is displayed in a size larger than the effect image that is displayed later in the color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image. It is characterized by being done.

According to such a gaming machine, the possibility suggestion image that is displayed in a predetermined color first is displayed in a size larger than the effect image that is displayed in a color corresponding to the predetermined color later. As a result, it is possible to make the possibility suggestion image that can trigger the color change of the effect image stand out, and to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the possibility suggestion image and the effect image.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or Reference Invention 4-2.
The effect image displayed in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a size larger than that of the possibility suggestion image previously displayed in the color.

According to such a gaming machine, the effect image displayed later in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a size larger than the possibility suggestion image displayed in the color first. As a result, it is possible to make the effect image whose color changes according to the color of the possibility suggestion image stand out, and to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the possibility suggestion image and the effect image.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-4.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The specific advance notice effect is an effect of displaying the possibility suggestion image in a predetermined color and then displaying an effect image different from the possibility suggestion image in a color corresponding to the color of the possibility suggestion image. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and further, the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game. It is possible to enhance the taste. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, in the first control state, the possibility suggestion notification unit makes the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image correspond to the color of the possibility suggestion image after the possibility suggestion image is displayed. The effect control displayed in color may be executed and may not be executed in the second control state.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-4.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
In the second control state, the possibility suggestion notification unit makes the effect image different from the possibility suggestion image correspond to the color of the possibility suggestion image after the possibility suggestion image is displayed in a predetermined color. It is characterized in that the advance notice effect displayed in a different color is executed and is not executed in the first control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since a specific advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and it is not executed in the first control state even in the second control state. By providing a notice effect, it is possible to enhance the taste of the possibility suggestion image suggesting the feasibility of the special game. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest by executing various gaming effects.

Further, other reference inventions are described.
A privilege granting unit (for example, a special game execution unit) that grants a privilege (for example, a special game),
A privilege grant determination unit (win / fail determination unit) that determines whether or not to grant the privilege (win / fail), and
Based on the determination result of the privilege grant determination unit, the possibility suggestion notification unit that suggests the determination result, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The possibility suggestion notification unit
A possibility suggestion element setting unit that sets the display color of the possibility suggestion element that suggests the possibility that the privilege is given from a plurality of kinds of colors corresponding to the possibility.
A possibility suggestion element display unit for displaying the possibility suggestion element in the display color set by the possibility suggestion element setting unit,
After the possibility suggestion element is displayed by the possibility suggestion element display unit, an effect image element different from the possibility suggestion element is displayed in a display color corresponding to the display color of the possibility suggestion element. Image element display and
It may be characterized by having.

Further, other reference inventions are described.
A privilege granting unit (for example, a special game execution unit) that grants a privilege (for example, a special game),
A privilege grant determination unit (win / fail determination unit) that determines whether or not to grant the privilege (win / fail), and
Based on the determination result of the privilege grant determination unit, the possibility suggestion notification unit that suggests the determination result, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The possibility suggestion notification unit
A possibility suggestion element setting unit for setting a character image element suggesting the possibility of being given the privilege from among a plurality of types of character image elements imitating different types of characters in accordance with the possibility.
A possibility suggestion element display unit for displaying the character image element of the type set by the possibility suggestion element setting unit, and
After the character image element is displayed by the possibility suggestion element display unit, the effect image element display unit that displays an effect image element different from the character image element in a display color corresponding to the type of the character image element. When,
May have.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the taste of the character image element that suggests the possibility (reliability) that a privilege (special game) is given. That is, after the character image element suggesting the possibility of the privilege being given is displayed, the character image element is displayed by displaying the effect image element different from the character image element in accordance with the display mode of the character image element. Since the effect of suggesting the determination result of the privilege grant determination means changes depending on the display mode, the taste of the character image element can be enhanced.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution unit that executes a special game that enables the variable entry port to enter the ball, and a special game execution unit.
It is a gaming machine provided with a gaming effect execution unit capable of executing a gaming effect according to a variable display of identification information.
As the game effect, there is a progress effect in which the effect can be progressed by displaying a predetermined effect image in stages (progress effect in which the display stages of the effect are set to a plurality of stages).
The effect image is composed of a combination of a progress image indicating that the effect image is progressively displayed on the next effect image and a specific effect execution image indicating execution of a specific effect different from the progress effect.
In the progress effect, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the effect image is progressively displayed on the next effect image, and when the specific effect execution image is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the effect The specific effect is executed without the image progressing and being displayed on the next effect image.
When the effect image is progressively displayed on the next effect image, the combination of the displayed effect images is different.

According to such a game machine, as a game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, there is a progress effect in which the displayed effect image is progressively displayed in a stepwise manner. The effect image displayed in this progress effect is composed of a combination of a progress image indicating that the progress is displayed on the next effect image and a specific effect execution image indicating execution of a specific effect different from the progress effect. .. Further, in a predetermined effect image in which these progress images and a specific effect execution image are combined, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the effect image is progressively displayed on the next effect image, and the specific effect execution image is displayed. Is displayed in a predetermined display mode, the specific effect shown in the specific effect execution image is executed without the effect image being progressively displayed on the next effect image. Further, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the effect image is progressively displayed on the next effect image, the combination of the progress image constituting the effect image and the specific effect execution image may be different combinations. There is.

As a result, when the effect image displayed in the progress effect is configured by combining the progress image and the specific effect execution image, and the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the progress is displayed on the next effect image. , The combination of the progress image and the specific effect execution image can be a different combination. Then, by displaying the progress on the next production image of the production image of the progress production, the expectation is raised, and when the combination of the production images is changed, the expectation is further raised, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

When the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the progress image is displayed on the next effect image, the combination of the displayed effect images (the type of the progress image and the specific effect execution image) is the same as that of the previous effect image. It is only necessary that the combination (the type of the progress image and the specific effect execution image) is different, and when the progress is displayed on the next effect image, the combination of the displayed effect images is the same as the combination of the previous effect images. There may be times when the same combination is obtained. Further, in the case of displaying the progress a plurality of times, it is sufficient that the combination changes when a part of the progress is displayed, and it is not necessary to change to a different combination each time. Of course, it may change to a different combination each time. Further, "the combination of the progress image constituting the effect image and the specific effect execution image is a different combination" means that one or more progress images constituting the effect image, one or more specific effect execution images, and one or more specific effect execution images. A part of them may be different from the progress image and the specific effect execution image constituting the previous effect image. It may have the same progress image and / or specific effect execution image as the previous effect image.

Further, the display mode may be different depending on whether the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode or the specific effect execution image is displayed in the predetermined display mode, or the same display mode may be used. It may be. Each has a predetermined display mode. For example, when a progress image is selected between a progress image and a specific effect execution image that compose the effect image, the selected image is surrounded by a red circle, the background is displayed in a different color, or the process is progressed. It is possible to show the player that the progress image has been selected / determined in a predetermined display mode by operating the display characters and characters of the image, changing the display size, and the like. In addition, when selecting a specific effect execution image, similarly, the surrounding of the selected image is surrounded by red circles, the background is displayed in a different color, and the display characters and characters of the specific effect execution image are displayed. It is possible to show the player that the specific effect execution image has been selected / determined in a predetermined display mode by operating or changing the display size.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
The specific effect is a character effect that displays a predetermined character and indicates whether or not the character achieves a predetermined purpose, and when the character achieves a predetermined purpose, the result of variable display of the identification information is displayed. It is characterized in that the specific result is obtained.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific effect executed when the specific effect execution image is displayed in a predetermined display mode is a character effect that produces an effect as to whether or not the predetermined character achieves the purpose. When the purpose is achieved, the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, and the special game is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the character production through the progress production, gradually raise the expectation of the player, and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or Reference Invention 5-2.
It has a plurality of the specific effect execution images having different display modes, and has a plurality of the specific effect execution images having different display modes corresponding to the plurality of the specific effect execution images.
The effect image is characterized in that it is composed of a combination of the progress image and one or a plurality of the specific effect execution images selected from the plurality of specific effect execution images.

According to such a gaming machine, it has a plurality of images having different display modes as specific effect execution images, and has a plurality of specific effects having different display modes corresponding to the plurality of specific effect execution images. Then, the effect image in the progress effect is composed of a combination of the progress image and one or a plurality of specific effect execution images. As a result, different specific effect execution images can be displayed depending on the effect image of the progress effect. Therefore, the expectation is raised by the displayed specific effect execution image, and when the combination of the effect images is changed, the expectation is further increased. It has made it possible to enhance the entertainment of the game.

The “plurality of specific effects having different display modes” refers to an effect in which different characters appear, an effect in which even the same character achieves different purposes, and the like.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3.
In the plurality of specific effects, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the identification information will be the specific result differs depending on which of the specific effects is executed.
In the progress effect, when the predetermined specific effect execution image is displayed in a predetermined display mode among the plurality of the specific effect execution images, the specific effect image is not displayed in progress on the next effect image, and the specific effect is displayed. It is characterized in that the specific effect corresponding to the execution image is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the identification information will be a specific result differs depending on which specific effect is executed among the specific effects corresponding to the specific effect execution image. Will be done. Then, among the plurality of specific effect execution images, the specific effect corresponding to the specific effect execution image displayed in the display mode of the calligraphy wisdom is executed. As a result, different specific effect execution images are displayed depending on the effect image of the progress effect, and the possibility of obtaining a specific result differs depending on the specific effect execution image in the predetermined display mode. Therefore, which specific effect execution image is selected. By paying attention to the crab, it was possible to further raise expectations and enhance the interest of the game when the combination of the production images changes.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
In the progress effect, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the effect image is progressed and displayed on the next effect image,
As the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image displayed by the progress display, the result of the variation display of the identification information is more than the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image displayed before the progress display. Is characterized by having the specific effect execution image indicating that there is a high possibility that the specific result will be obtained.

According to such a gaming machine, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the next effect image is displayed in the progress effect, the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image is the previous effect. It corresponds to a specific effect in which the result of variable display of the identification information is more likely to be the specific result than the specific effect execution image constituting the image. As a result, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the next effect image is displayed, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the specific result. In addition, the greater the number of times the progress is displayed in the next production image, the higher the expectation of the player for the specific result.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-5.
In the progress effect, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the effect image is progressed and displayed on the next effect image,
As the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image displayed by the progress display, the result of the variation display of the identification information is more than the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image displayed before the progress display. Is not displayed, which indicates that the specific effect execution image is unlikely to be the specific result.

According to such a gaming machine, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the next effect image is displayed in the progress effect, the specific effect execution image constituting the effect image is the previous effect. The specific effect execution image indicating that the result of the variable display of the identification information is less likely to be the specific result than the specific effect execution image constituting the image is not displayed. As a result, when the progress image is displayed in a predetermined display mode and the next effect image is displayed, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player for the specific result. In addition, the greater the number of times the progress is displayed in the next production image, the higher the expectation of the player for the specific result.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-6.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The specific advance notice effect is characterized by being the progress effect.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the first control state, and further, the preference of the progress effect that suggests the feasibility of the special game. Can be increased. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the progress effect may be executed in the first control state and not executed in the second control state.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-8 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-6.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The possibility suggestion notification unit is characterized in that the progress effect is executed in the second control state and the progress effect is not executed in the first control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since a specific advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and it is not executed in the first control state even in the second control state. By providing a notice effect, it is possible to enhance the taste of the progress effect that suggests the feasibility of the special game. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Yet another reference invention is
It is a gaming machine that can execute a specific production in which the production stages are set to multiple stages.
The specific effect is
When a plurality of preview images are displayed during the production of a certain stage and then the production of the certain stage progresses to the production of the next stage, there is a combination of the plurality of preview images displayed during the production of the next stage. It is configured to be different from the combination of multiple preview images displayed during the stage production.
The plurality of notice images include a progress suggestion image and a transition effect content suggestion image, and when the progress suggestion image is displayed in a predetermined mode, the process proceeds to the next stage of the effect, while the transition effect content suggestion image. Is displayed in a predetermined mode, the suggested effect may be executed without proceeding to the next stage effect.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 5, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest by executing various gaming effects.

(Reference Invention 6)
In the conventional gaming machine, the game entertainment is enhanced when the game production with high jackpot reliability is executed, while the game entertainment is enhanced when the jackpot is relatively disadvantageous to the player as a result of the game production. There was a risk of a decline. The present reference invention 6 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a gaming effect that enhances the interest of the gaming.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 for solving the above-mentioned problems is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A game effect execution unit that executes a predetermined game effect according to the variable display of the identification information, and
A game effect display unit that can display the game effect,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution unit that executes a special game that enables the variable entry port to enter the ball, and a special game execution unit.
An input means for the player to input a predetermined value, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the game effect, there is an input effect that can change the effect being executed with the input to the input means.
The input effect is composed of an input image suggesting input to the input means, a display frame displayed in the game effect display unit, and an effect image displayed in the display frame.
When the input effect is executed as the game effect, the display mode of the display frame and the display mode of the effect image are changed according to the input to the input means, and the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. It is characterized by notifying the possibility that the result of is a specific result.

According to such a gaming machine, as a game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, there is an input effect in which the effect can be changed by inputting the player to the input means. Further, the input effect includes an input image suggesting input to the input means, a display frame displayed in the game effect display unit, and an effect image displayed in the display frame. Then, in the input effect, by changing the display mode of the display frame and the display mode of the effect image according to the input to the input means, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result is notified. do. As a result, it is possible to notify the possibility of a specific result depending on the display mode of the display frame and the display mode of the effect image in the display frame by the input of the player. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, before the hit / fail judgment result by the hit / fail judgment unit is displayed as a symbol, the effect content of the input effect being executed is changed by inputting to the input means for each input valid period, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is displayed. It is possible to gradually notify the possibility of a specific result (big hit reliability) and raise expectations for the production. That is, during the execution of the input effect, the input valid period during which the input to the input means is valid (the period during which the input to the input means can change the effect being executed) is set a plurality of times, and the input during the input valid period is set. Each time the above is performed, the display mode of the display frame and the display mode of the effect image in the display frame can be changed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
The display frame has a plurality of display modes, and has a plurality of display modes.
It has a plurality of display modes as the display mode of the effect image, and has a plurality of display modes.
It is characterized in that it notifies the possibility that the result of the variable display of the identification information differs as the possibility of becoming a specific result depending on the combination of the displayed display modes.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a plurality of display modes as display modes of the display frame that can be displayed in the input effect, and a plurality of display modes as display modes of the effect image that can be executed in the display frame in the input effect. Have. Then, depending on the combination of the display frame and the display mode of the effect image, the possibility that the result of the variable display of the identification information may differ as a specific result shall be notified. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode of the display frame and the effect image according to the input of the player in the input effect, and to show the possibility that a specific result can be obtained by the combination thereof. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2.
When the input effect is executed as the game effect, the display mode of the display frame and the display mode of the effect image change stepwise according to the input to the input means. ..

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to change the display frame and the display mode of the effect image stepwise in accordance with the input to the input means in the input effect. As a result, the display frame and the display mode of the effect image can be changed a plurality of times by the input of the player in the input effect, so that the player's motivation for the input operation can be increased and the game interest can be enhanced. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3.
When the input effect is executed as the game effect, the display mode of the display frame and the display mode of the effect image change under each condition in accordance with the input to the input means, and the identification information It is characterized by notifying the possibility that the result of the variable display of is different as the possibility of becoming a specific result.

According to such a gaming machine, the display mode of the display frame and the display mode of the effect image are changed according to each condition in accordance with the input to the input means. As a result, the display mode of the display frame and the display mode of the staging image can be changed depending on the respective conditions. Therefore, the combination of the display mode of the display frame and the staging image is diversified, and the display frame and the staging image are displayed. Since the mode can be changed a plurality of times, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the input operation and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the identification information varies depending on the combination of the display mode displayed by changing the display mode of the display frame, the display mode of the staging image, and the display mode of the input image according to the input to the input means. It may inform that the display result may be different as a specific result.
Further, when the input effect is executed as the game effect, the display mode of the display frame, the display mode of the effect image, and the display mode of the input image change according to the input to the input means under each condition. , The result of the variable display of the identification information may be different as the possibility of becoming a specific result.

The “change depending on each condition” means, for example, determining a frame display mode determining means for determining a display mode of a display frame, an image display mode determining means for determining a display mode of an effect image, and a display mode of an input image. It is possible to exemplify a mode in which each means determines a display frame, an effect image, and a display mode of an input image, which has an input image mode determining means.

Further, instead of determining the display mode of each display frame, the display mode of the effect image, and the display mode of the input image according to the respective conditions, the display mode of the display frame and the display mode of the effect image, A plurality of combinations of the display mode of the input image are set in advance, and the display mode determining means determines a predetermined combination (display mode of the display frame, display mode of the staging image, and input image) from the plurality of combinations. A combination of the display mode of the above and the display mode of the above) may be determined and used as the display mode (control).

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The specific advance notice effect is characterized by being the input effect.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the first control state, and further, the taste of the input effect suggesting the possibility of a specific result. Can be increased. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 6-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The input effect is a notice effect that is a decision target in the second control state, and is a notice effect that is not a decision target in the first control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since a specific advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and it is not executed in the first control state even in the second control state. It is possible to provide a notice effect and enhance the taste of the input effect that suggests the possibility of a specific result. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 6, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest by executing various gaming effects.

(Reference Invention 7)
Further, the gaming machine of the reference invention 7-1 invention is
An acquired information storage unit that can store acquired information acquired based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and an acquired information storage unit.
Among the acquired information stored in the acquired information storage unit, the identification information display unit that variablely displays the identification information based on the acquired information for which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the identification information display unit.
A game effect execution unit that executes a predetermined game effect according to the variable display of the identification information, and
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, the gaming machine includes a special game execution unit that executes a special game that enables the variable entrance to enter the ball.
When the acquired information storage unit stores the specific acquisition information, the period from when the specific acquisition information is stored until the fluctuation start condition of the specific acquisition information is satisfied and the result of the variation display of the identification information is shown. In addition, it is possible to execute a pre-notification effect that notifies the content of the game effect that is executed in association with the variable display of the identification information related to the specific acquisition information.
The advance notification effect includes a first notification effect for notifying the contents of a plurality of game effects including the contents of the game effect executed in association with the variable display of the identification information related to the specific acquisition information, and the specific acquisition information. It has a second notification effect that notifies only the content of the game effect that is executed in association with the variable display of the identification information, and is characterized in that the first notification effect is executed before the second notification effect. Is to be.

According to such a game machine, an acquisition information storage unit capable of storing acquired information is provided, and when the acquisition information storage unit stores specific acquisition information, the specific acquisition information is stored and then stored in the specific acquisition information. During the period until the result of the variable display of the identification information is shown, it is possible to execute the advance notification effect that notifies the content of the game effect to be executed in advance. The advance notification effect includes a first notification effect that notifies the content of a plurality of game effects including the content of the game effect to be executed, and a second notification effect that notifies only the content of the game effect to be executed. Therefore, the first notification effect is executed before the second notification effect. As a result, when the specific acquisition information is stored, it is possible to execute the advance notification effect for stepwise advance notification of the game effect to be executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information related to the specific acquisition information. It is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1.
It has an effect display unit that displays the advance notification effect, and has an effect display unit.
In the second notification effect in the advance notification effect, an effect of notifying the content of the game effect executed in association with the variable display of the identification information related to the specific acquisition information is displayed at the first position of the effect display unit. After that, the effect display unit is moved and displayed at a second position from the end of the first position, and is displayed in a size smaller than the display size at the first position. ..

According to such a gaming machine, it has an effect display unit that displays a pre-notification effect, and in the second notification effect, after displaying the effect in a predetermined size at the first position of the effect display unit, it is more than the first position. The effect is moved and displayed at the second position, which is the end of the effect display unit, and the effect is displayed in a small size. As a result, when the game effect to be executed is specified by the advance notification effect that notifies the game effect step by step, it is displayed in a small size at the end of the effect display unit, and the confirmed game effect is executed. It is possible to keep the game on standby, maintain the interest of the game, and improve the visibility of other game productions that have been performed up to that point.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2.
The first notification effect and the second notification effect in the advance notification effect are characterized in that they are executed during a period from when the specific acquisition information is stored until the fluctuation start condition of the specific acquisition information is satisfied. Is to be.

According to such a gaming machine, the first notification effect and the second notification effect in the advance notification effect are executed during the period from the storage of the specific acquisition information to the establishment of the fluctuation start condition of the specific acquisition information. And. As a result, the game effect executed along with the variable display of the identification information is notified before the variable display of the identification information related to the specific acquisition information starts, so that the player's expectation is maintained for a long period of time. , It becomes possible to enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-3.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The specific advance notice effect is characterized in that it is the advance notification effect.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. Further, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in the first control state, and further enhance the taste of the advance notification effect. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 7-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Inventions 7-1 to 7-3.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The advance notification effect is a notice effect that is a decision target in the second control state, and is characterized in that it is a notice effect that is not a decision target in the first control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since a specific advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and it is not executed in the first control state even in the second control state. It is possible to enhance the taste of the advance notification effect by providing a notice effect. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

The advance notification effect may be executed from before the fluctuation start condition of the specific acquisition information is satisfied until the fluctuation start condition of the specific acquisition information is satisfied and the result of the variation display of the identification information is shown. good. Further, the advance notification effect may be started before the fluctuation start condition of the specific acquisition information is satisfied, and may be continuously executed until the variation display related to the specific acquisition information is being executed. In addition, the advance notification effect (effect content suggestion display) is the result of the variable display of the identification information related to the specific acquired information, or the content of the game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information related to the specific acquired information. May be used to notify. Further, the game effect notified by the advance notification effect may be an effect indicating the possibility that the result of the variable display of the identification information related to the specific acquisition information will be the specific result (that is, the jackpot reliability).

Further, the plurality of game effects executed in the first notification effect or the like may be game effects having different jackpot reliability. As a result, the player expects that in the second notification effect, the content of the game effect with high jackpot reliability among the game effects shown in the first notification effect will be notified, and the game will be played in a stepwise manner. It is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as another aspect, a display means capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification symbols and
A game information acquisition means for acquiring game information (acquisition information) due to the establishment of game information acquisition conditions, and
A winning / failing determination means for determining the success / failure of a game based on the game information acquired by the game information acquisition means, and
The identification symbol variation means for notifying the determination result of the hit / fail determination means according to the stop mode of the identification symbol which is stopped and displayed after the plurality of identification symbols are variablely displayed by the display means.
A holding means that stores the game information acquired by the game information acquisition means until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and suspends the variation display of the identification symbol and the notification of the determination result for the game information.
In a gaming machine provided with an effect executing means (game effect executing unit) for executing an effect by the display means during the variable display of the identification symbol.
During the period from the pending display before the variable display of the identification symbol to the start of execution of the effect, the effect content suggestion display (advance notification effect) that suggests the content of the effect is executed by the display means. Equipped with means (preliminary notification effect execution means)
The effect content suggestion display is a first-stage suggestion (first notification effect) that suggests the contents of a plurality of effects including the effect executed by the effect executing means, and the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means. It has a second stage suggestion (second notification effect) that suggests only.
In the second stage of the suggestion, the effect content suggestion display execution means displays the effect content suggestion display in the center of the display area of the display means, then moves to a different position and performs the display in a smaller size than before. It may be a feature.

In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine,
The effect content suggestion display executing means may be characterized in that the effect content suggestion display is executed over the variable display of a plurality of reserved identification symbols before the variable display of the identification symbol on which the effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 7, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest by executing various gaming effects.

(Reference Invention 8)
Further, the gaming machine of the reference invention 8-1 invention
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a special game execution unit that executes a special game that enables the variable entry port to enter the ball, and a special game execution unit.
A gaming machine including a game effect executing unit capable of executing a game effect according to the variable display of the identification information.
As the game effect, an effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, which can be executed before the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, and the variable display of the specific identification information. It has a special game notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed when the result is a specific result.
As the advance notice effect, there are a first advance notice effect, a second advance notice effect, and a third advance notice effect, which have different production modes.
The special game notification effect includes a first special game notification effect and a second special game notification effect having different production modes.
When the result of the variation display of the identification information is a specific result, when the first advance notice effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the first special game notification effect is executed and the advance notice is executed. When both the second advance notice effect and the third advance notice effect are executed as the effect, the second special game notification effect is executed.

According to such a gaming machine, as an effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information and which can be executed before the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, the effect mode is different. It has 1 advance notice effect, 2 advance advance notice effect, and 3 advance advance notice effect. Further, as the special game notification effect for notifying that the special game is executed, there are a first special game notification effect and a second special game notification effect having different production modes. Then, when the first advance notice effect is executed when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result, the first special game notification effect is executed, and the result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific result. In this case, if both the second advance notice effect and the third advance notice effect are executed, the second special game notification effect is executed.

As a result, when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, that is, when the special game is executed, different special game notification effects are executed depending on the type and combination of the advance notice effects to be executed, and the game is played. It will be possible to diversify the production and enhance the entertainment of the game.

Further, the second advance notice effect and the third advance notice effect may both be a movable advance notice effect for operating a movable object, or may be a display advance notice effect on the display unit. Further, the second advance notice effect may be a movable advance notice effect for operating a movable object, and the third advance notice effect may be a display advance notice effect on the display unit. On the contrary, the second advance notice effect may be a display advance notice effect on the display unit, and the third advance notice effect may be a movable advance notice effect for operating a movable object.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1.
In the case where the result of the variation display of the identification information is a specific result, if the first advance notice effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the second special game notification effect is not executed and the advance notice effect is not executed. When both the second advance notice effect and the third advance notice effect are executed as the advance notice effect, the first special game notification effect is not executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first advance notice effect is executed, the second special game notification effect is not executed, and when both the second advance notice effect and the third advance notice effect are executed. The first special game notification effect is not executed in. As a result, it is possible to predict the special game notification effect to be executed after that by the advance notice effect executed, and it is possible to raise the player's interest in the advance notice effect and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2.
The special game includes a first special game and / or a second special game in which the benefits given to the player are different after the special game is completed.
The first special notification effect is an effect of notifying the execution of the first special game, and the second special notification effect is an effect of notifying the execution of the second special game.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a first special game and a second special game in which the privilege given to the player in the special game and / or the privilege given to the player after the completion of the special game is different. The first special notification effect is an effect of notifying the execution of the first special game, and the second special notification effect is an effect of notifying the execution of the second special game. As a result, a special game in which different benefits are given is executed depending on the special notification effect to be executed, so that it is possible to pay attention to which advance notice effect is executed and enhance the game interest.

In addition, the benefits (number of rounds, number of prize balls that can be obtained) given to the player in the special game are different from "the benefits given to the player in the special game and / or after the end of the special game are different". Cases and game states set after the end of the special game (high base state, low base state, high accuracy low base state, high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state, low accuracy low base state, small hit RUSH, etc.) Includes cases where are different, and cases where both or one of them is different.

Further, the first special game that notifies the execution by the first special notification effect may be a special game that is advantageous to the player as compared with the second special game. In this way, when the first advance notice effect is executed, the player's gaming interest can be further enhanced as compared with the case where both the second advance notice effect and the third advance notice effect are executed. It will be possible. On the contrary, the second special game in which the execution is notified by the second special notification effect may be a special game that is advantageous to the player as compared with the first special game. In this way, when both the second advance notice effect and the third advance notice effect are executed, the player's gaming interest can be further enhanced as compared with the case where the first advance notice effect is executed. It will be possible.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-3.
The first advance notice effect is an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined purpose is achieved.
When the first advance notice effect is executed and the predetermined purpose is successfully achieved, the first special game notification effect is executed.
The first special game notification effect is not executed when the first advance notice effect is executed and the achievement of the predetermined object fails.

According to such a gaming machine, the first advance notice effect that leads to the first special notification effect is an effect that indicates whether or not a predetermined purpose is achieved. Then, if the first advance notice effect succeeds in achieving the predetermined purpose, the first special game notification effect is executed following the first advance notice effect to achieve the predetermined purpose. If it fails, the first special game notification effect is not executed following the first advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the execution mode (whether or not the purpose is achieved) of the first advance notice effect, raise the expectation for the execution of the first special notification effect, and enhance the game interest. Further, since it is different from the execution mode of the second special notification effect, that is, the execution mode of the advance notice effect can be different depending on the special game, and the game effect can be diversified.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-4.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The specific advance notice effect is at least one of the first advance notice effect, the second advance notice effect, and the third advance notice effect.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in the first control state, and further enhance the taste of the advance notice effect and the special notification effect. It will be possible. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 8-1 to Reference Invention 8-4.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
At least one advance notice effect of the second advance notice effect and the third advance notice effect is a notice effect that is a decision target in the second control state, and is not a decision target in the first control state. It is characterized by being.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since a specific advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and it is not executed in the first control state even in the second control state. By providing a notice effect, it is possible to enhance the taste of the advance notice effect and the special notification effect. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the second advance notice effect may be executed a plurality of times. That is, if the second advance notice effect is executed one or more times and then the third advance notice effect is executed, the second special game notification effect may be executed (execution is confirmed). Further, if the number of executions of the second advance notice effect is large, there is a high possibility that the third advance notice effect will be executed, that is, the second special game notification effect will be executed.

Further, the advance notice effect may be an effect showing the content of the variation display of the specific identification information and can be executed before the variation display of the specific identification information is completed, or the variation of the specific identification information. It may be an effect indicating the content of the display and may be an effect that can be executed before the start of the variable display of the specific identification information.

In addition, it is an effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, and is a pre-effect (advance notice effect) that is executed in association with the variable display of the identification information before the variable display of the specific identification information.
It is an effect showing the content of the variable display of the specific identification information, and has a specific effect executed in association with the variable display of the specific identification information.
The game effect includes a first game effect and a second game effect.
When the first game effect is executed along with the variable display of the predetermined identification information, and the second game effect is not executed during the variable display of the predetermined identification information, the first game effect is before. It is a pre-article production,
When the first game effect is executed along with the variable display of the predetermined identification information, and the second game effect is executed during the variable display of the predetermined identification information, the first game effect is It may be the specific effect.

Further, since the "preliminary effect (advance notice effect)" can be executed with the variable display of the identification information prior to the variable display of the specific identification information, it can be executed with the variable display of the specific identification information. May be good. "Contents of variable display of identification information" means the result of variable display of identification information, game effects (reach type and notice type) executed during variable display of identification information, and the possibility that special games are executed. Etc.

In addition, "a determination means (hit / fail determination means) that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, an identification information display means that variablely displays identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, and a variable display of specific identification information. Based on the pre-judgment means for pre-determining and the pre-judgment result of the pre-judgment means, the result of Therefore, it may be provided with a pre-effect execution means capable of executing the pre-effect. "

Further, the pre-determination means is supposed to make a pre-determination based on the information (also referred to as acquired information, game information, acquired data) acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and becomes the acquired information storage means (holding information storage means). The pre-judgment may be made based on the stored acquisition information (holding information), or the pre-judgment may be made based on the pre-judgment information (acquisition data) different from the acquisition information (hold information). .. That is, it may have the first acquired information for performing the preliminary determination and the second acquired information for performing the hit / fail determination.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 8, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest by executing various gaming effects.

(Reference Invention 9)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A special game execution unit that executes a special game when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result,
A gaming machine including a game effect executing unit capable of executing a game effect according to the variable display of the identification information.
As the game effect, there is a form change effect that changes the display form of the specific change symbol into a first display form and a second display form.
When the form change effect is executed and the specific change symbol is displayed in the first display form, it is displayed in a form imitating a symbol different from the identification information, and the specific change symbol is displayed in the second display form. When it is displayed, it is characterized in that it is displayed in a form imitating the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, as a game effect executed in association with the variable display of the identification information, a form change effect that changes the display form of the specific deformed symbol into a first display form and a second display form is performed. Have. When the specific change symbol is displayed in the first display form, the form imitates a symbol different from the identification information, and when the specific change symbol is displayed in the second display form, the form imitates the identification information. As a result, when a specific change symbol is displayed, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the display form, so that it is possible to diversify the game effects and enhance the game interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1.
As the game effect, there is a reach effect in which two of the identification symbols are in a reach mode in which the identification symbols are the same, and a predetermined effect is executed.
When the specific change symbol is displayed in the second display form and is displayed in a form imitating the identification symbol, the specific change symbol imitating the identification symbol becomes the reach mode and the reach effect is executed. It is characterized by that.

According to such a gaming machine, when a reach effect is provided as a game effect and the specific change symbol is displayed in a form imitating the identification symbol as the second display form, the specific change symbol is regarded as the reach mode. It is assumed that the reach production is executed. As a result, the player pays attention to what kind of display form the specific change symbol changes to, and enhances the interest of the game. Further, when the specific change symbol is in the second display form, the reach effect is executed, so that the player raises the expectation for the special game and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2.
When the specific change symbol is displayed in the first display form and is displayed in a form imitating a symbol different from the identification symbol, the form change effect is executed again.

According to such a gaming machine, when the specific change symbol becomes the first display form and is displayed in a form imitating a symbol different from the identification symbol, the form change effect is executed again. As a result, when the specific change symbol does not become the second display form but becomes the first display form, the form change effect is executed again after that, so that the player raises the expectation for the special game. Enhancing game entertainment. In addition, it is expected that a reach effect will be generated and a special game will be executed in the form change effect again, and the game will be enhanced.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 9-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 9-1 to Reference Invention 9-3.
When the specific change symbol is displayed in the first display form and is displayed in a form imitating a symbol different from the identification symbol, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner.

According to such a gaming machine, when the specific change symbol becomes the first display form and is displayed in a form imitating a symbol different from the identification symbol, the identification information is variablely displayed. As a result, when the form change effect is executed, when the specific change symbol becomes the first display form, the identification information is variablely displayed, so that the execution period of the variable display of the identification information continues for a long period of time. Become. In addition, this raises the player's expectation for the special game and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 9-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 9-1 to Reference Invention 9-4.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The specific advance notice effect is characterized by being the form change effect.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. Further, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in the first control state, and further enhance the taste of the form change effect. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 9-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 9-1 to Reference Invention 9-4.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The form change effect is a notice effect that is a decision target in the second control state, and is characterized in that it is a notice effect that is not a decision target in the first control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since a specific advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and it is not executed in the first control state even in the second control state. It is possible to enhance the taste of the form change effect by providing a notice effect. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 9, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest by executing various gaming effects.

(Reference Invention 10)
Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 is
An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A privilege granting unit that grants a predetermined privilege based on the result of the variable display of the identification information being a specific result, and
A gaming machine including a game effect executing unit capable of executing a game effect according to the variable display of the identification information.
As the game effect, it has a decorative image change effect that changes the display mode of a specific decorative image composed of a plurality of image elements.
The decorative image change effect is
A first image display in which different image elements selected from the plurality of image elements are sequentially displayed at at least two display timings and the displayed state is maintained for the first time, and
At the special display timing, which is the timing after the predetermined image element is displayed at the at least two display timings, the image element different from the image element displayed at the at least two display timings is displayed, and the display is performed. The second image display, which maintains the state for the second time, can be executed.
When the first image display and the second image display are executed in the decorative image change effect, the privilege is granted as compared with the case where the first image display is executed and the second image display is not executed. It is characterized by the high possibility of being done.

According to such a gaming machine, as a game effect that can be executed according to the variable display of the identification information, there is a decorative image change effect that changes the display mode of the specific decorative image composed of a plurality of image elements. Further, in the decorative image change effect, a first image in which different image elements selected from a plurality of image elements constituting the specific decorative image are sequentially displayed at at least two display timings and the display state is maintained for the first time. It is possible to execute display and a second image display that displays an image element different from the image elements displayed so far and maintains the display state for a second time at a special display timing after the first image display. And. Then, when the first image display and the second image display are executed in the decorative image change effect, the possibility of granting the privilege is higher when the first image display is executed and the second image display is not executed. And. As a result, in the decorative image change effect, attention is paid to the display mode of the image element of the specific decorative image a plurality of times (at least twice), and the display of additional image elements that may occur after that is expected, and the game is played. Increase the interest. The display timings at least twice and the special display timings are different timings in chronological order.

A variable entry port that can be changed to a state in which the game ball can enter and a state in which the game ball cannot enter, and a variable entry when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result. It may be provided with a special game execution unit for executing a special game in which the ball mouth is in a state where the ball can be entered. In addition, the privilege granting unit may be a special game execution unit. In addition, it is equipped with a game state setting unit that sets the game state after the end of the special game to the first game state or the second game state, and the second game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. As for the privilege given by the granting unit, the gaming state at the end of the special gaming state may be set as the second gaming state.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1.
The first time for displaying the image element in the first image display is longer than the second time for displaying the image element in the second image display.

According to such a gaming machine, the first time for maintaining the display state of the image element displayed in the first image display is the second time for maintaining the display state of the image element displayed in the second image display. It shall be longer than the time. As a result, the display time of the first image display can be maintained for a relatively long period of time, the player can have an expectation that the second image display will be executed after the first image display, and the game interest can be enhanced. It will be possible.

Further, a special additional effect may be executed between the first image display and the second image display to encourage whether or not to execute the second image display. By having a case where the special additional effect is executed and the second image is displayed and a case where the special additional effect is executed and the second image is not displayed, the game entertainment during the execution of the special additional effect is enhanced. It becomes possible.

The first time for displaying the image element in the first image display is longer than the second time for displaying the image element in the second image display. The second time for displaying the element may be longer than the first time for displaying the image element in the first image display.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2.
Equipped with a variable entry port that can be changed between a state in which a game ball can enter and a state in which a game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, the privilege granting unit grants the privilege that enables the variable entrance to enter the ball.
As the game effect, there is a specific game effect that indicates whether or not the privilege is given by the effect.
In the decorative image change effect, when the first image display and the second image display are executed, the specific game effect is executed after that.

According to such a gaming machine, when the result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific result, a privilege of making the variable entrance port possible to enter the ball is given. In addition, as a game effect, it has a specific game effect that indicates whether or not a privilege is given. Then, in the decorative image change effect, when the first image display and the second image display are executed, the specific game effect is executed thereafter. As a result, when the second image display is executed, the process shifts to the specific game effect. Therefore, the player expects that the second image display is executed after the first image display, and enhances the game interest. ..

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 10-4 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-3.
In the decorative image change effect, if the first image display is executed and the second image display is not executed, the specific game effect is not executed thereafter.

According to such a gaming machine, if the first image display is executed and the second image display is not executed in the decorative image change effect, the specific game effect is not executed thereafter. As a result, the player remarkably raises the expectation that the second image display is executed after the first image display, and enhances the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 10-5 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4.
In the decorative image change effect, when all the plurality of image elements constituting the specific decorative image are displayed, the case where only a part of the plurality of image elements constituting the specific decorative image is displayed is more than the case where only a part of the plurality of image elements constituting the specific decorative image is displayed. It is characterized in that there is a high possibility that a privilege will be given.

According to such a gaming machine, displaying all of the plurality of image elements constituting the specific decorative image is more advantageous than displaying only a part of the plurality of image elements constituting the specific decorative image. Is highly likely to be granted. As a result, the player expects that all the image elements constituting the specific decorative image are displayed in the first image display and / or the second image display, and also expects the occurrence of the second image display. Enhance the interest of games.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 10-6 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-5.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a specific advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The specific advance notice effect is characterized by being the decorative image change effect.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since the advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment in the first control state, and further enhance the taste of the decorative image change effect. .. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machines of Reference Invention 10-7 are the gaming machines of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-5.
Equipped with a game production control unit that executes control related to game production
The game state includes a first control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is a predetermined amount, and a second control state in which the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is larger than that of the first control state. ,
The game effect control unit includes a advance notice effect storage unit that stores a plurality of advance notice effects having different execution modes, a advance notice effect determination unit that determines a advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice effect stored by the advance notice effect storage unit, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect execution unit that executes the advance notice effect determined by the effect determination unit.
The advance notice effect execution unit indicates the feasibility of the special game by executing the advance notice effect in a predetermined execution mode in accordance with the variable display of the identification information.
As the advance notice effect to be decided by the advance notice effect determination unit in the first control state, there is a advance notice effect that the advance notice effect determination unit does not determine in the second control state.
The decorative image change effect is a notice effect that is a decision target in the second control state, and is a notice effect that is not a decision target in the first control state.

According to such a gaming machine, in the first control state where the control processing amount of the game effect control unit is small, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect which is not the determination target in the second control state where the control processing amount is large. As a result, it is possible to optimize the control processing applied to the game effect control unit by changing the advance notice effect to be determined by the advance notice effect determination unit according to the control processing amount of the game effect control unit. In addition, since a specific advance notice effect that can be determined only in the first control state is provided, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the first control state, and it is not executed in the first control state even in the second control state. It is possible to enhance the taste of the decorative image change effect by providing a notice effect. In addition, as a whole, it is possible to diversify the game production and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, a privilege grant determination means (privilege granting section) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege,
In a gaming machine provided with a display means for displaying whether or not the privilege is granted in a predetermined mode that can be identified and displaying a specific effect for a predetermined period until the predetermined mode is displayed.
A notice image control means for inserting a notice image at at least two display points (display timings) different in time series within a predetermined period in which the specific effect is displayed and controlling the display so as to display each for a predetermined time is provided.
The preview image control means
An image element selection means for selecting an image element to be displayed on the preview image at each of the at least two display points from a plurality of image elements having a predetermined number on the preview image.
An image element display means for visually displaying the image element selected via the image element selection means at at least two display points, and an image element display means.
It has a special display point setting means for setting a special display point into which the notice image is inserted after the notice image is inserted at at least two display points in the predetermined period.
When the notice image is inserted at the special display point, the possibility that the privilege is given is set to be higher than when the notice image is not inserted at the special display point. It may be a feature.

According to the gaming machine of the reference invention 10, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest by executing various gaming effects.

Further, one or more of the above-mentioned reference inventions 1 to 10 may be combined.

1 Pachinko game machine, 7b Production symbol display area (production symbol display area), 8 Production symbol, 20 1st start port, 21 2nd start port, 30 1st big prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 39 Specific area , 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display (2nd special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board (sub control) Part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a effect 1st special figure hold indicator, 103b effect 2nd special figure hold indicator.

Claims (1)

An identification information display unit that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A privilege granting unit that grants a predetermined privilege based on the result of the variable display of the identification information being a specific result, and
A gaming machine including a game effect executing unit capable of executing a game effect according to the variable display of the identification information.
As the game effect, it has a decorative image change effect that changes the display mode of a specific decorative image composed of a plurality of image elements.
The decorative image change effect is
A first image display in which different image elements selected from the plurality of image elements are sequentially displayed at at least two display timings and the displayed state is maintained for the first time, and
At the special display timing, which is the timing after the predetermined image element is displayed at the at least two display timings, the image element different from the image element displayed at the at least two display timings is displayed, and the display is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that a second image display that maintains the state for a second time and that the state can be executed.

Images